Sony Camcorder PDW F800 User Manual

Position of up-side Audio output

switch

CH-1/CH-3

MIX

Channel 1 audio

[F800]

Channels 1 and 2 mixed

b ASSIGN (assignable) 5 switch

audio (stereo)

You can assign the desired functions to these

switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the

OPERATION menu.

Nothing is assigned to these switches when the

camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent

to a selection of OFF in the menu).

CH-2/CH-4

Channel 2 audio

Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4

Position of up-side Audio output

switch

CH-1/CH-3

MIX

Channel 3 audio

For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN

selector positions” on page 208.

Channels 3 and 4 mixed

audio (stereo)

CH-2/CH-4

Channel 4 audio

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE

jack on the rear of the unit, you can hear the audio in

stereo. (On the AUDIO-1 page of the

• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background

through a window

• Any high contrast scene

MAINTENANCE menu, HEADPHONE OUT must

be set to STEREO.)

i WHITE BAL (white balance memory)

switch

f VDR SAVE/STBY (VDR save/standby)

Controls adjustment of the white balance.

PRST: Adjusts the color temperature to the preset

value (the factory default setting: 3200K).

Use this setting when you have no time to

adjust the white balance.

A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment

settings already stored in A or B. Flick the

AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 18) on the

WHT side, to automatically adjust the white

balance, and save the adjustment settings in

memory A or memory B.

switch

Switches the status of the power supply to the

VDR while recording is stopped (STOP) or

paused (REC PAUSE).

SAVE: The disc stops rotating and some

functions are disabled. Power consumption is

lower than when the camcorder is in STBY

mode. Battery life is extended.

STBY: Recording to the disc starts immediately

when the REC START button is pressed.

You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch

even when ATW is in use.

B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and

WHITE SWITCH is set to ATW on the

WHITE SETTING page of the

Note

An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start

of recording when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to

SAVE.

OPERATION menu, ATW is activated.

When this switch is adjusted, the new setting

appears on the setting change/adjustment

progress message display area of the viewfinder

screen for about three seconds.

1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white

balance of the picture being shot is adjusted

automatically for varying lighting conditions.

g GAIN selector

Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match

the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains

corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be

selected in the menu. (The factory settings are

L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.)

When this switch is adjusted, the new setting

appears on the setting change/adjustment

progress message display area of the viewfinder

screen for about three seconds.

j STATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display

on/page selection/display off) switch

To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF

switch to OFF.

For details, see “Setting gain values for the GAIN

Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU

ON/OFF switch to OFF.

h OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic

contrast control) switch

ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed

upward, a window to confirm the menu

settings and status of the camcorder appears

on the viewfinder screen. The window

consists of four pages, which are switched

each time the switch is pushed upward. Each

page is displayed for about 10 seconds.

OFF: To clear the page immediately after

display, push this switch down to the OFF

position.

Switches the video signal, which is output to the

video disc drive (referred to as “VDR”),

viewfinder, and video monitor from the camera

section, between the following two.

BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.

CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera.

When this is selected, you can switch DCC

on and off.

1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very

bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the

subject, objects in the background will be lost in the

glare. The DCC function will suppress the high

intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is

particularly effective in the following cases.

• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day

You can select the pages to be displayed on the

menu.

For details, see “Displaying the status confirmation

screens” on page 206.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For details about “Memory Stick”, see “Handling

the “Memory Stick”” on page 216.

k MENU ON/OFF switch

To use this switch, open the cover.

This switch is used to display the menu on the

viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.

Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to

OFF.

n Cover

Right side (near the rear)

ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen

or the test signal screen.

OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder

screen or the test signal screen.

l CANCEL/PRST (preset)/ESCAPE

q; qa

switch

F REV

PLAY/PAUSE

F FWD

EJECT

To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF

switch to ON.

Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU

ON/OFF switch to OFF.

CANCEL/PRST: Flicking this switch up to this

position displays the message to confirm

whether the previous settings are cancelled or

settings are reset to their initial values,

depending on the menu operating condition.

Flicking this switch up to this position again

cancels the previous settings or resets the

settings to their initial values.

STOP

qs qd qf

ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,

which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.

Each time the switch is flicked to this

position, the page returns to one stage higher

in the hierarchy.

m “Memory Stick” compartment

qg qh qj

DISP SEL HOLD

RESET

DISPLAY

BRIGHT

EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER TC U-BIT

a Built-in speaker

The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound

during recording, and playback sound during

playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to

reinforce visual warnings.

Label

“Memory Stick” Access indicator

If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE

jack, the speaker output is suppressed

automatically.

Open the cover of the menu operating section,

and insert a “Memory Stick”, with the notch

facing downward, in the direction shown by the

arrow, so that it clicks into place.

To remove a “Memory Stick”, first press it in to

release the lock, then withdraw.

For details about alarms, see “Operation Warnings”

on page 247.

b LCD monitor

The “Memory Stick” access indicator lights in

green when a “Memory Stick” is loaded, and

lights in red when the “Memory Stick” is being

accessed for reading or writing.

Displays camera video, VDR-related warnings,

remaining battery capacity, remaining disc

capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor

and monochrome LCD” on page 23.

approximately four times normal playback speed,

press the F REV button or F FWD button during

playback.

At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F

FWD indicator light.

c WARNING indicator

Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs

in the VDR section.

k F FWD (fast forward) button and

For details about the meaning of the states of the

WARNING indicator, see “Operation Warnings” on

page 247.

indicator

This plays back at high speed in the forward

direction. The indicator lights during high-speed

playback in the forward direction.

d ACCESS indicator

This lights when data is written to or read from

the disc.

l PREV button

This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.

During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes.

If you press this together with the F REV button,

the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded

clip on the disc.

e Protection cover of the audio control

section

Open to access the audio control section (see page

27).

f Protection cover of the GUI screen

m STOP button

operations section

Press this button to stop disc playback.

Open to access the GUI screen operations section

(see page 27).

n NEXT button

This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.

During the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes.

If you press this together with the F FWD button,

the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded

clip on the disc.

g Monochrome LCD

This shows the remaining battery capacity,

remaining disc capacity, time data, and so on.

For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor

and monochrome LCD” on page 23.

o DISP SEL (display selection) /EXPAND

(expand function) button

h EJECT button and indicator

With each press of this button, the display in the

LCD monitor changes as follows.

Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc.

The indicator flashes while the disc is being

ejected.

Display indication

Video with

superimposed

Meaning

The LCD monitor displays

the same text information

i F REV (fast reverse) button and

indicator

information (CHAR) as the viewfinder.

This plays back at high speed in the reverse

direction. The indicator lights during high-speed

playback in the reverse direction.

Video without

superimposed

information (MONI)

Status display

(STATUS)

The video only appears.

Counter indications,

j PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator

warnings, audio levels, and

similar information appear.

No video image appears.

Press this button to view play back video images

using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.

The indicator lights during playback.

If you press this button when the thumbnail

screen is displayed, the duration of the selected

clip is divided into 12, and the first frame of each

of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail

display (expand function). Each time you press

this button, the division is repeated (to a

Press this button again during playback to pause,

outputting a still image. At this time the indicator

flashes.

This unit is equipped with an image search

function at approximately four times normal

playback speed, for easy checking of recorded

material. To use the image search function at

maximum of three times, with 1,728 divisions).

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

information for the user such as scene number,

shooting place, etc.

Hold down the SHIFT button and press this

button to step back through the division process.

For details, see “Setting the Time Data” on page 74.

For details of the expand function, see page 118.

This button returns to the previous screen when

pressed during thumbnail display.

p HOLD (display hold)/CHAPTER

(chapter function) button

Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data

displayed in the counter display section. (The

timecode generator continues running.) Pressing

this button again releases the hold.

For details, see “GUI screen operations” on page

116.

r DISPLAY switch

This cycles the data displayed in the counter

display through the sequence COUNTER, TC,

and U-BIT.

You can use this button, for example, to

determine the exact time of a particular shot.

For details of the counter display, see page 25.

COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/

playback time (hours, minutes, seconds,

frames).

TC: Display timecode.

U-BIT: Display user bit data.

If you press this button when the clip thumbnail

screen is displayed, those frames on which shot

marks are recorded appear in a list (chapter

function). Press the button once more to return to

the normal thumbnail display.

By displaying thumbnails with shot marks

attached in place of index frames, you can check

the contents of clips more easily and more

quickly. This is also useful for cueing up long

clips.

For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor

and monochrome LCD” on page 23.

s BRIGHT (brightness) button

Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor

backlight, and turns the backlight of the

monochrome LCD on and off.

Each press of the button selects the next setting in

the order shown in the following table.

For details of the chapter function, see page 118

q RESET/RETURN button

Resets the value shown in the time counter

display. According to the settings of the PRESET/

REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 27) and the F-

RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 27), this

button resets the display as follows.

Setting LCD monitor

backlight

Monochrome

LCD backlight

High (select this to view Lit

the LCD monitor

outdoors in the

daytime)

Settings of switches To reset

Brightness between H Lit

and L

DISPLAY switch:

COUNTER

Counter to 0:00:00:00

Low (select this to view Lit

the LCD monitor

indoors or outdoors at

night)

DISPLAY switch:

Timecode to 00:00:00:00

PRESET/REGEN/

CLOCK switch:

PRESET

F-RUN/SET/R-RUN

switch: SET

OFF

Off (the display is also Off

off)

Status Display on the LCD monitor and

monochrome LCD

DISPLAY switch:

U-BIT

User bits data to 00 00 00

The following display appears on the LCD

monitor display which is set to STATUS with the

DISP SEL/EXPAND button, and on the

monochrome LCD.

PRESET/REGEN/

CLOCK switch:

PRESET

F-RUN/SET/R-RUN

switch: SET

a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the

disc, those bits which can be used to record useful

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If NTSC AREA is selected

Indication

Field or frame Scan mode

rate

OVER

59.9i

59.94 fields per Interlace

second

1080

422

59.9i 24bit

NDF

EXT-LK

HOLD

59.9P

59.94 frames per Progressive

second

. . .

01 23 45 15

FRM

MIN

SEC

29.9P

29.97 frames per Progressive

second

WARNING:HUMID

23.98 frames per Progressive

second

DISC E

BATT E

23.9P

PEAK

a) For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZ-FC01

23.98P Record and Playback Software is installed.

LCD monitor

If PAL AREA is selected

Indication

Field or frame Scan mode

rate

50i

50 fields per

second

Interlace

50P

50 frames per

second

Progressive

Monochrome LCD

25P

25 frames per

second

a Resolution

Indicates the resolution of HD output video.

1) Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page

of the OPERATION menu (see page 162).

Indication

1080

Resolution (horizontal × vertical)

1080 lines (1920 × 1080)

720 lines (1280 × 720)

Note

720

There may be no indication displayed when this unit

cannot identify the system frequency, for example, when

playing back a disc recorded with other equipment.

b Video format

Indicates the format of video being currently

played back or recorded.

d Audio format

Indicates the format of audio being currently

played back or recorded.

Indication

Format

Bit rate

HD422 50

MPEG HD422 50 Mbps

HD420 HQ/SP/ MPEG HD420 35/25/18 Mbps

Indication

Quantization bit rate/sampling

frequency

IMX 50/40/

MPEG IMX

DVCAM

50/40/30 Mbps

25 Mbps

24bit

16bit

24 bits/48 kHz

16 bits/48 kHz

DVCAM

e Audio level indicators

Indicates the audio recording or playback levels

of channels 1 to 4.

a) LP is playback only.

b) For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZ-MD01

SD Record and Playback Software is installed.

f Status display

PB: Appears during playback.

NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is

selected.

c System frequency

Indicates the system frequency of video being

currently played back or recorded.

EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode

generator is locked to an external signal input

to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOLD: Appears when the internal timecode

generator is stopped.

g Time counter display

Switches displays of time counter, timecode, and

user bits, depending on the position of the

DISPLAY switch.

When the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed to

hold the timecode value, the timecode is

displayed in the format shown below. When the

HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed again to

release the hold, the timecode is displayed in the

normal format.

Lights when the HOLD/CHAPTER button

is pressed.

h Warning indicator area

Displays warnings when trouble with recording

or moisture condensation occurs.

For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 247.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

i Remaining disc capacity indicator

Indication

Remaining recording time

More than 30 minutes

25 to 30 minutes

20 to 25 minutes

15 to 20 minutes

10 to 15 minutes

5 to 10 minutes

DISC E [x x x x x x x] B

DISC E [x x x x x x x] B (flashing)

2 to 5 minutes

0 to 2 minutes

0 minutes

j Remaining battery capacity indicator

Indication

Battery voltage

BP-L90A/L60S/L80S

Other batteries

17.0 V or more

16.0 to 17.0 V

15.0 to 16.0 V

14.0 to 15.0 V

13.0 to 14.0 V

12.0 to 13.0 V

11.0 to 12.0 V

11.0 V or less

BATT E [x x x x x x x] F

15.5 V or more

15.1 to 15.5 V

14.6 to 15.1 V

13.8 to 14.6 V

12.9 to 13.8 V

12.0 to 12.9 V

10.8 to 12.0 V

10.8 V or less

a) You can change the threshold voltages on the

BATTERY 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu

(see page 176).

Indication

Battery voltage

BP-GL95/GL65/IL75/M100, Anton Bauer Battery

System

80 to 100%

70%

BATT E [x x x x x x x] F

BATT E [x x x x x x x]

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GUI screen operations section and audio control

section

e F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/

recording run) switch

Selects the operating mode of the internal

timecode generator. The operating mode is set as

explained below, depending on the position of the

switch.

4 5

LEVEL

F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless

of the operating state of the VDR. Use this

setting when synchronizing the timecode

with an external timecode.

SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.

R-RUN: Timecode advances only during

recording. Use this setting to have a

consecutive timecode on the disc.

THUMBNAIL

CH-3

F-RUN

SET

R-RUN

ESSENCE

MARK

SET

AUTO

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

CH-1 CH-2

S.SEL

SUB CLIP

PRESET

AUDIO IN

CH-4

FRONT

REAR

WIRELESS

REGEN

CLOCK

DISC MENU

SHIFT

0 qa

For details, see “Setting the timecode” on page 74

and “Setting the user bits” on page 74.

a THUMBNAIL indicator

This lights when thumbnails are displayed.

f LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1/2

recording level) knobs

b THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK

Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on

channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH-

1/CH-2 switches are set to MANUAL.

button

Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search

or create a clip list (see page 117).

When pressed, the whole-screen display changes

to a thumbnail display. Press once more to return

to the whole-screen display.

g SUB CLIP indicator

This lights when using a clip list for playback.

For a thumbnail search using essence marks, hold

down the SHIFT button and press this button (see

page 119).

h SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button

Press this to play back according to a clip list.

You can play back a particular clip or sequential

clips, or carry out a search of the selected clip list.

To display the Disc Menu which allows you to

carry out operations such as saving, recalling, or

deleting a clip list, hold down the SHIFT button

and press this button.

c SET/S.SEL (set/scene selection) button

and arrow buttons

Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit

settings, and for GUI screen operations.

The arrow buttons select items and change values,

and the SET/S.SEL button confirms settings.

Pressing this button with thumbnails displayed

and the SHIFT button held down adds a sub clip

to the current clip list (scene selection).

i SHIFT button

Use this in combination with other buttons.

j PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/

See page 116 for more information about GUI screen

operations.

CLOCK switch

Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize

the existing timecode.

See page 128 for more information about scene

selection.

PRESET: Records a new timecode.

REGEN: Records timecode continuous with the

existing timecode recorded on the disc.

Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/

R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-

RUN mode.

CLOCK: Records timecode synchronized to the

internal clock. Regardless of the setting of

the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the

camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.

d MENU button

Displays a special menu for operations in GUI

screens (see page 112).

When the whole-screen is displayed, pressing this

button has no effect, and the operation is invalid.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

k AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio

channel 1/2 adjustment method

selection) switches

Left side and upper section

Select the audio level adjustment method for each

of audio channels 1 and 2.

AUTO: Automatic adjustment

MANUAL: Manual adjustment

l AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4

(audio channel 1/2/3/4 input selection)

switches

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches

Select the audio input signals to be recorded on

audio channels 1 and 2.

FRONT: Audio input signals from the

microphone connected to the MIC IN

connector

REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device

connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2

connectors

SDI IN

GENLOCK

(OPTION)

TC IN

TEST

OUT

WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF

portable tuner (not supplied) if it is installed

OUT

AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches

Select the audio input signals to be recorded on

audio channels 3 and 4.

F (FRONT): Audio input signals from a

microphone connected to the MIC IN

connector

R (REAR): Audio input signals from an audio

device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/

CH2 connectors

W (WIRELESS): Audio input signals from the

UHF portable tuner (not supplied) if it is

installed

a ASSIGNABLE 3/4 switches

You can assign the desired functions to these

switches on the ASSIGNABLE page of the

OPERATION menu.

Nothing is assigned to these switches when the

camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent

to a selection of OFF in the menu).

For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN

“Selecting the display items” on page 201.

b Lid of the disc compartment

This opens when the EJECT button on the top

panel is pressed. Press the side of the lid to close.

c SDI IN (OPTION) connector (BNC

type)

This is an input connector for the optional CBK-

HD01 HD/SD SDI Input Board. When the CBK-

HD01 is installed, the unit can record HD-SDI or

SD-SDI signals that are input to this connector.

d GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)

connector (BNC type)

• This connector inputs a reference signal when

the camera is to be genlocked or when timecode

is to be synchronized with external equipment.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Use the GENLOCK page of the

g TC OUT (timecode output) connector

MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock

H-phase (phase of horizontal sync signal).

Available reference signals vary depending on

the current system frequency as shown in the

following table.

(BNC type)

To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the

timecode of this unit, connect this connector to

the external VTR’s timecode input connector.

Rear

System frequency

Available reference

signals

1080/59.94i

1080/50i

1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i

1080/50i, 625/50i

1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i

1080/50i, 625/50i

1080/23.98PsF

1080/29.97P

1080/25P

1080/23.98P

720/59.94P

720/50P

1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i

1080/50i, 625/50i

• This connector also inputs a return video signal.

You can display the HD-Y (1080i) signal in the

viewfinder screen while holding the RET button

down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the

ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION

menu.

• Input an external video signal. When the

optional CBK-SC02 Analog Composite Input

Board is installed, the unit can record analog

composite video signals that are input to this

connector.

AES/EBU

AUDIO IN _LINEAES/EBU

LINE

MIC

48V

OFF

MIC

48V

OFF

DC OUT

12V

AUDIO OUT

0.5A

SUPER

e TC IN (timecode input) connector

CH1

1/2

CH2

3/4

SDI OUT

(BNC type)

To apply an external lock to the timecode of this

unit, input the reference timecode.

8 9

For details of timecode, see “Setting the timecode”

on page 74.

a TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)

f TEST OUT connector (BNC type)

Lights up during recording. It will not light if the

TALLY switch is set to OFF. This indicator also

flashes to indicate warnings (see page 22) in the

same manner as the REC/TALLY indicator in the

viewfinder.

This connector outputs the video signal for a

video monitor. The output signal can be selected

from composite video, HD-Y, R, G, B, and a

composite video signal like that displayed in the

LCD monitor. To switch output signals, use the

TEST OUT SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1

page of the OPERATION menu.

If the output signal is set to one of R, G, or B, then

this setting changes to HD-Y when the camcorder

is powered off and on again.

For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 247.

b TALLY switch

Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator

function.

Depending on menu settings, menus, timecode,

and shot data can be superimposed on the image

on the monitor. This connector can also be used to

synchronize the timecode of an external VTR

with the timecode of the camcorder.

c USB connector

This is a USB 2.0 connector.

Connect one of the following devices, depending

on what you want to do.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be

damaged.

Device

Enables

Windows USB

Text input wth the on-screen

g +48V/OFF switches

keyboard or mouse software keyboard (see page

124)

Select either of the following positions for the

microphones to be connected.

+48V: For a microphone to use an external power

supply

OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power

supply

USB flash drive

Recording of proxy data (see

page 104)

Loading of planning metadata

(see page 136)

Before using this connector, you must set

ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of

the OPERATION menu to “ENABL” (see page

212).

h REMOTE connector (8-pin)

Connect an RM-B150/B750 remote control unit,

which makes it possible to control the camcorder

remotely.

(network) connector (RJ-45 type)

This is a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector for

network connection.

Before using this connector, you must set

ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of

the OPERATION menu to “ENABL” (see page

212).

Note

Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control

Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the

camcorder POWER switch.

i SDI OUT 1 connector (BNC type)

Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with

embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and

SDSDI output, use the SDI OUT 1 SELECT item

on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION

menu.

CAUTION

For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral

device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this

port. Follow the instructions for this port.

When you connect the network cable of the unit to

peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent

malfunction due to radiation noise.

j SDI OUT 2 connector (BNC type)

Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with

embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and

SDSDI output, use the SDI OUT 2 SELECT item

on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION

menu.

Setting menus, timecode, or shot data can be

superimposed on the camera output video

depending on the menu settings, and you can

view them on the monitor screen.

e EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)

You can monitor the E-E sound during recording

and playback sound during playback. When an

alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound

through the earphone. You can use this with the

EARPHONE jack on the front of the unit at the

same time. Plugging an earphone into the jack

automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.

You can select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO-

1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

k AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1

and channel-2 input) connectors (XLR

type, 3-pin, female)

f LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors

These are audio input connectors for channels 1

and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment

or a microphone.

These select the audio source of the audio input

signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2

connectors.

When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set

to AES/EBU, the CH1 connector is used for

channel-1 and -2 inputs, and the CH2 connector,

for channel-3 and -4 inputs.

LINE: Line input audio equipment

AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal

MIC: Microphone input

Note

When these switches are in the MIC position, and the

+48V/OFF switch is set to +48V, if you inadvertently

connect any audio device other than a microphone to the

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

l AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-

a Plug

pin, male)

Connect to the VF connector on the camcorder.

Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio

channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The

audio signals are selected by the MONITOR

switch.

b Stopper

Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the

camcorder when it is slid from side to side.

c Camera operator tally indicator

(i.LINK) S400 connector (6-pin,

IEEE1394 compliant)

Lights up while camcorder is recording. This

indicator can be covered when not in use.

This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in

the same manner as the tally indicator and the

REC indicator in the viewfinder.

Use an i.LINK cable (DV cable) to connect the

camcorder to a computer for File Access Mode

file operations.

For details, see “File Operations in File Access

Mode (for Windows)” on page 230).

d Eyecup

Note

e Indicators and status display

When you connect the camcorder and other equipment,

such as a hard disk drive, with an i.LINK interface to a

computer with i.LINK connectors, turn off the power of

the computer, the other equipment, and the camcorder

before connecting them using the i.LINK cable (DV

cable). If a bus-powered type ¹⁾hard disk drive or similar

equipment is connected while the computer is powered

on, electric current flows into the camcorder because of

the high voltage caused by the load shift of the computer

power, and this may cause a malfunction.

For details, see “Status display on the viewfinder

screen” on page 32.

f Diopter adjustment ring

Allows for optimal focus adjustment.

g Tally indicator

Lights up while camcorder is recording. Set the

TALLY switch to OFF when not in use. The

brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY

switch.

1) Equipment that can be powered through i.LINK cable

(DV cable)

This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in

the same manner as the camera operator tally

indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder.

HDVF-20A viewfinder (optional)

h PEAKING control

Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture

sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This

control has no effect on the output signals of the

camcorder.

i CONTRAST control

Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control

has no effect on the output signals of the

camcorder.

j BRIGHT control

Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control

has no effect on the output signals of the

camcorder.

PEAKING

CONTRAST

BRIGHT

DISPLAY

ASPECT

ZEBRA

OFF

TALLY

HIGH

OFF

LOW

MOMENT

k TALLY switch

Controls the tally indicator located on the front of

the viewfinder.

HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to

high.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.

LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.

TALLY/REC

BATT

l ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch

Controls the zebra pattern display on the

viewfinder screen as follows.

ON: A zebra pattern appears and stays.

OFF: The zebra pattern disappears.

MOMENT: A zebra pattern appears and stays for

about five seconds.

m DISPLAY/ASPECT switch

VTR

SAVE

Turns the marker indication on and off, and

switches between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios for

viewfinder screen display.

DISPLAY: When the marker indication is

enabled with the camcorder, the marker

indication on the viewfinder screen turns on

and off every time you push the switch up to

this position.

ASPECT: Each push of the switch down to this

position toggles the mask display on and off.

(Make mask display settings on the

MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu

(see page 158).)

a TALLY (green tally) indicator

Lights when the camcorder is the following

states.

• Picture Cache mode enabled

• Disc Exchange Cache mode enabled

• Recording with HDSDI REMOTE I/F on the

CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu set to G-TLY

Flashes when the camcorder is the following

states.

• Set to Auto Interval Rec mode or the

consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode

(1 flash per second)

n Viewfinder cable

o Microphone holder

• Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode or

recording in the consecutive mode of Manual

Interval Rec mode (4 flashes per second)

• Set to the single-shot mode of Manual Interval

Rec mode, or recording in that mode (2 flashes

per second)

Status display on the viewfinder

screen

Indicators

b BATT (battery) indicator

The following indicators are arranged above and

below the viewfinder screen to show the current

state and adjustments of the camcorder.

This indicator starts flashing when the battery

connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted,

and stays lit when the battery is completely

exhausted.

To prevent interruption during operation, replace

the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing.

The battery power level at which the indicator starts

flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu. For details, see page 175.

c REC (recording, red tally) indicator

Lights up while camcorder is recording.

This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in

the same manner as the tally indicator and the

camera operator tally indicator.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

switches are displayed at the top and bottom of

the screen.

d Viewfinder screen

e VTR SAVE indicator

The messages that give details of the settings and

adjustment progress and results can also be made

to appear for about three seconds while settings

are being changed, during adjustment, and after

adjustment.

This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE/STBY

switch is set to SAVE, putting the VDR into

power save mode.

f ! (warning) indicator

For details about the display item selection, see

This indicator lights when any of the following

conditions occurs with the corresponding item set

to ON on the ‘!’ LED page of the OPERATION

menu.

For details about setting change and adjustment

progress messages, see “Change confirmation/

adjustment progress messages” on page 202.

• The gain is set to other than 0 dB.

• The SHUTTER selector is not set to the

For details about marker display, see “Setting the

marker display” on page 203.

1), 2)

standard setting.

• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.

• ATW is enabled.

• The lens extender is used.

All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder

screen are shown below.

• The FILTER selector is set to other than ND:1.

• The reference value of auto iris adjustment is

not the standard value.

Top of viewfinder screen

12 3

8 9

59.9

i[30]

For the PDW-F800, lighting-up conditions of

each item can be set on the ‘!’ LED STD page of

the OPERATION menu.

13.4V

HD422 50 E0001:001/004 DC IN

K+

13.9

CONT

FAN

35-30

1) The standard SHUTTER setting differs as follows,

depending on the recording format.

1080/50i, 1080/59.94i, 720/50P, 720/59.94P (SCAN

MODE: 59.9P): The SHUTTER selector is set to

OFF.

WHITE:NG

LEVEL TOO HIGH

TCG

EXT

01:23:45:15 HDSDI

REC2

5600

LOW LIGHT

W:A

18 dB

1/ 2000

125C

F1.7

1080/23.98P, 720/59.94P (SCAN MODE: 23.9P):

0qa

a Color temperature

₄₈shutter is ON.

₅₀shutter is ON.

1080/29.97P: ¹

₆₀shutter is ON.

1080/25P: ¹

Displays a color temperature calculated from the

gain of R and B, in the range 0.0 K to 99.9 K (in

steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed

depending on the OFFSET WHT setting (see

page 212).

2) For the PDW-F800, when SHUTTER SELECT on the

SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE

menu is set to DEGREE, the standard setting is

“SHUTTER selector: OFF”, regardless of the

recording format.

No display: OFFSET WHT is OFF

+: The value of OFFSET WHT is greater than

3200K.

–: The value of OFFSET WHT is less than

3200K.

Layout of the status display on the

viewfinder screen

The viewfinder screen displays not only the video

picture but also characters and messages

indicating the camcorder settings and operating

status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.

When the menu screen is not displayed and the

DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch is

set to on, the items for which an ON setting was

made on the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or VF DISP

3 page of the OPERATION menu or with related

b Video format

Indicates the format of video being currently

played back or recorded (see page 57).

The video aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) can also be

displayed when the recording format is set to

IMX 50, IMX 40, IMX 30, or DVCAM.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tuner battery is low: The channel number and

c Extender

indicator of the corresponding channel

flash.

1) DWR-S01D only

Displays the extender settings of this unit and the

lens.

EX: The lens extender is on.

08: The lens shrinker is on.

h Power source voltage/battery

x2D: This unit’s extender function is on.

Ex2D: The lens extender and the digital extender

function of this unit are both on.

remaining capacity

When the unit is powered from a battery pack,

indicates the remaining capacity of the power

source voltage. When the unit is powered from a

battery connected to the DC IN connector or AC

adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe,

indicates the power source voltage.

d Zoom position

Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in

the range from 0 to 99.

e Clip information

i External battery

Appears if the power is supplied from an AC

adaptor connected to the DC IN connector.

Displays clip information during playback.

During clip playback and search (when title

display is off): Displays the clip number and

total number of clips.

During clip playback and search (when title

display is on): Displays the title specified in

planning metadata as the clip name,

according to the setting of Planning Clip

Name in Clip Info. Area in the Disc Menu

(see page 137).

j Clip Continuous Rec function

Appears when the Clip Continuous Rec function

(see page 95) is enabled.

CONT (lit): Continuous recording to extend the

previous clip is possible.

CONT (flashing): A new clip will be created and

recorded.

During clip list playback: Displays the name of

the clip list, the sub clip number, and the total

number of sub clips.

k Cooling fan control mode

This appears when FAN CONTROL on the CAM

CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu

is set to “R.MIN” or “MIN”.

FAN (lit): The cooling fan is operating at low

speed.

FAN (flashing): The cooling fan is operating at

low speed, but the temperature inside the unit

has risen to a level just below the level at

which an alarm occurs.

[F800]

f System frequency and frame rate

During Slow & Quick Motion shooting and

playback, displays the system frequency and the

frame rate. The frame is rounded to a 2-digit

integer and displayed in brackets ([ ]) (see page

93).

This display does not appear during normal

shooting and playback.

Note

If you do nothing while the FAN display is flashing, the

unit will attempt to lower the internal temperature by

operating the fan at high speed. When the FAN display

begins to flash, you should stop shooting and other

operations and wait until the internal temperature drops,

and then restart operations.

g Wireless microphone reception level

When a UHF portable tuner is installed in the

camcorder, “W” appears together with four-

segment reception level indicators for each of the

channels (1 or 2 channels) that can be used by the

tuner. The indications are as follows.

Normal use: The number of white segments

indicates the strength of the signal level.

Muted: The number of gray segments indicates

the strength of the signal level.

l Memory symbol and remaining

memory capacity

When a USB flash drive is connected to the

enabled USB connector, a memory symbol

appears indicating the mount status of the USB

flash drive and its remaining capacity.

Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed

instead of the indicators.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the

OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be

set to HDSDI.

Memory symbol and remaining capacity display

Icon Remaining Description

capacity

display

b Setting change and adjustment

progress message display area

Lit

Proxy data recording is

enabled, and there is at least 5

minute of remaining capacity.

Proxy data recording is

For details, see “Change confirmation/adjustment

progress messages” on page 202.

Flashing

enabled, but there is less than

5 minute of remaining

c External input status and aberration

correction function

capacity.

EXT HDSDI/SDSDI/VBS: When the REC

VIDEO SOURCE item on the SOURCE SEL

page of the OPERATION menu has been set

to EXT, then “EXT” and the signal type

(HDSDI, SDSDI, or VBS) flashes when a

valid signal is input to this unit.

Out

INH

Out

Proxy data recording is

disabled.

The USB flash drive is write

protected.

The USB flash drive could not

For details, see “Recording video from external

devices” on page 103.

be mounted.

a) Use a USB flash drive with enough free capacity

remaining.

b) Enable the proxy data recording function.

c) Clear the write protection on the USB flash drive.

d) Format or exchange the USB flash drive.

ALAC: Appears when ALAC in the CAM

CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu is set to “AUTO” (see page 183).

d Electric color temperature filter

Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to

ON.

Bottom of viewfinder screen

e Filter

HD422 50 E0001:001/004 DC IN

K+

13.4V

Indicates the currently selected filter type (see

page 17).

13.9

CONT

FAN

35-30

WHITE:NG

LEVEL TOO HIGH

TCG

[F800]

EXT

01:23:45:15 HDSDI

REC2

5600

The optical CC filter position (A, B, C, or D)

appears to the right side of the ND filter display

(1 to 4).

LOW LIGHT

W:A

18 dB

1/ 2000

125C

F1.7

4567890 qa qs qd qf

[700]

a External device control and single clip

When the function that switches between

electrical CC filters has been assigned to an

ASSIGN switch (see page 63), and when a

remote control unit has been connected, the

electrical CC filter position (A, B, C, or D)

appears to the right side of the ND filter display

(1 to 4).

playback

REC2: Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I/F in

the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu is set to “CHARA”,

and this unit is controlling recording by an

external device connected to the SDI OUT

1/2 connectors (HDSDI output).

f White balance memory

SNGL: Appears when SINGLE CLIP MODE in

the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu is set to “ON”, and

the unit is searching or playing a clip (see

page 84).

Indicates the currently selected white balance

automatic adjustment memory.

A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set

to A.

B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set

to B.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set

to PRST or when the preset button on an RM-

B150 has been pushed.

The example in the above figure shows the colors

when AU REF LEVEL is set to –20 dB.

l Remaining disc capacity

Indicates the remaining recording time (in

minutes) of the disc.

T: Displayed when ATW is being used.

3200: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW

3200K function is set to ON.

4300: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW

Examples of remaining recording time indication

4300K function is set to ON.

Indication

Remaining recording

time

5600: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW

5600K function is set to ON.

6300: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW

6300K function is set to ON.

110 <

100 <

90 <

120 to 110 minutes

110 to 100 minutes

100 to 90 minutes

90 to 85 minutes

85 to 80 minutes

1) PDW-700 only

g Timecode

90 - 85

85 - 80

Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time,

timecode, user bits or other information selected

by the DISPLAY switch (see page 23).

h Gain value

Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video

amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector.

20 - 15

20 to 15 minutes

15 to 10 minutes

10 to 5 minutes

5 minutes

15 - 10

10 - 5

5MIN (flash)

4MIN (flash)

3MIN (flash)

2MIN (flash)

1MIN (flash)

0MIN (flash)

i Shutter speed

4 minutes

Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.

However, if the SHUTTER selector (see page 17)

is set to OFF, nothing is displayed.

3 minutes

2 minutes

1 minute

For details of the displayed shutter speed, see

“Setting the Electronic Shutter” on page 65.

0 minutes

Note

j Operation/alarm message display area

During shooting in special modes such as Interval Rec or

Slow & Quick Motion, the indicated remaining disc time

may differ from the time which can be actually shot and

recorded. This is particularly true when FRAME RATE

is set to the maximum value in Slow & Quick Motion

shooting, in which case the actual remaining time is

about half of the indicated remaining disc time.

For details, see “Operation/alarm messages” on

page 250.

k Audio level

Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel

2. The peak indication of the VDR level meter is

related as follows to the audio level.

m Remaining clips display

Displays the remaining number of clips that can

be recorded. The display flashes once per second

when the number of remaining clips is less than

10.

-52

-28

-20

-12 -8 (dB)

1 Audio channel 1 level indicator

2 Audio channel 2 level indicator

3 VDR level meter indicator

n Iris setting/auto iris override

Indicates the F value (iris setting) of the lens.

Auto iris override is shown by an indicator made

up of two segments each on the upper and lower

sides.

The segment colors change from gray to white at

or above the AU REF LEVEL set on the AUDIO-

2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. This

setting does not affect the relationship between

the number of lit segments and the audio levels.

For details, see “Changing the Reference Value for

Automatic Iris Adjustment” on page 69.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter2 Preparations

To attach the battery pack

Preparing a Power

Supply

Press the battery pack against the back

of the camcorder, aligning the line on

the side of the battery pack with the

matching line on the camcorder.

For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and

AC adaptors listed below.

• BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Lithium-ion

Battery Pack

• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC

Adaptor

Using a battery pack

When a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery

Pack is used, the camcorder will operate

continuously for the time shown below.

Model name

BP-GL95

BP-GL65

BP-L60S

Operating time

1 BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S

2 Align these lines.

Approx. 120 minutes

Approx. 75 minutes

Approx. 100 minutes

Slide the battery pack down until its

“LOCK” arrow points at the matching

line on the camcorder.

BP-L80S

WARNING

Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat

such as sunshine, fire or the like.

Note

The battery pack operating time depends on the

frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient

temperature when used.

Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger

suitable for each battery.

For details on the battery charging procedure, refer

to the battery charger operation manual.

Note on using the battery pack

A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully

recharged.

1 “LOCK” arrow

2 Matching line on the camcorder

Note

If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal

may be damaged.

Preparing a Power Supply

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To detach the battery pack

Holding the release button in, pull the battery

pack up.

Attaching the Viewfinder

CAUTION

When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the

camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct

sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the

viewfinder and cause fire.

Note

The viewfinder is supplied separately.

Release button

Attaching the HDVF-20A/C35W

Notes

Note

• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS

indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery

pack.

When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the

following points.

• Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling

the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF

connector. If you make this connection when the

camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not

function properly.

• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing

the battery pack.

Using AC power

• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the

camcorder’s VF connector. If the coupling is loose,

noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not

operate properly.

When using the AC-DN10 AC Adaptor

Mount an AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the

same way as a battery pack, then connect to the

AC power supply.

For more information about the connection of the

viewfinder and camcorder, contact a Sony service

representative.

The AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.

1 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right

positioning ring, 2 attach the

viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting

shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder left-

to-right positioning ring.

To an AC outlet

Attaching the Viewfinder

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring

Stopper

Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring

Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob

Moving the viewfinder shoe up

Couple the viewfinder connector to the

VF connector.

Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder

positioning levers and the front-to-back

viewfinder positioning knobs, and then

pull the viewfinder slide assembly

forward.

VF connector

Detaching the viewfinder

Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal

wrench, detach the viewfinder slide

assembly and handle front cover.

You can carry out this by following the attaching

procedure in reverse order, but there is an

additional action to take: when detaching the

viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the

stopper.

Adjusting the viewfinder position

To adjust the viewfinder left-right position,

loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust

the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back

positioning knob.

Attaching the Viewfinder

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder

Rotation Bracket

Handle front cover

By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation

Bracket (not supplied), you can rotate the

viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg

does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying

the camcorder.

Bolt with

hexagonal hole

Viewfinder slide assembly

Attach the handle front cover with the

bottom edge up.

Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous

section “Moving the viewfinder shoe

up” to detach the viewfinder slide

assembly.

Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied

bolts.

Bolts supplied

with the BKW-401

To attach the viewfinder

at the top

To attach the viewfinder

at the bottom (factory

default)

Adjust the front-to-back position so

that the arm of the BKW-401 does not

touch the handle when it is raised.

Attach the viewfinder slide assembly,

reversing the steps of the removal

procedure.

Attaching the Viewfinder

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjust position so that arm

does not touch handle

To reattaching the eyepiece

Align the red marks on the eyepiece

locking ring and the viewfinder barrel.

Align the red mark on the end of the

eyepiece end with the red marks on the

eyepiece locking ring and the

viewfinder barrel. Then insert the

eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel.

Turn the eyepiece locking ring

clockwise until its “LOCK” arrow

points at the red mark on the viewfinder

barrel.

Detaching the eyepiece

Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the

screen from further away. It is also easy to

remove dust from the viewfinder screen and

mirror when the eyepiece is detached.

When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a

new one.

For details of a replacement eyecup, contact a Sony

service representative.

Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully

counterclockwise, to align the red

marks on the locking ring and the

viewfinder barrel.

Adjusting the viewfinder focus

and screen

To adjust the viewfinder focus

Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the

viewfinder image is sharpest.

Diopter adjustment ring

3 2

1 Locking ring

2 Locking ring match mark

3 Match mark on the viewfinder barrel

Detach the eyepiece.

To adjust the viewfinder screen

Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the

viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.

Match mark on end of eyepiece

Attaching the Viewfinder

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Area of Use

PEAKING

CONTRAST

BRIGHT

DISPLAY

ASPECT

ZEBRA

TALLY

OFF

MOMENT

HIGH

OFF

LOW

When using the unit for the first time

1 PEAKING control

2 CONTRAST control

3 BRIGHT control

The area of use is not factory preset. Before using

this unit, you need to set this item. (You cannot

use the unit without setting this item.)

To set the area of use

POWER switch

MENU knob

Set the POWER switch to the ON

position.

The screen for setting the area of use appears

in the viewfinder.

FORMAT SETTING

COUNTRY : NOT SELECTED

SYSTEM LINE

: 1080

SET FORMAT

AND TURN OFF ONCE.

Press the MENU knob.

zon the left of NOT SELECTED changes to

?, and you can now select the area of use.

FORMAT SETTING

COUNTRY :?NOT SELECTED

SYSTEM LINE

: 1080

SET FORMAT

AND TURN OFF ONCE.

Setting the Area of Use

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turn the MENU knob to display the

desired area of use.

Setting the Date/Time of

the Internal Clock

Setting

Area of use

NTSC(J)AREA

NTSC area (Japan)

NTSC AREA

NTSC area (for areas other

than Japan)

PAL AREA

You can set or change the date and time of the

internal clock. The date and time set are reflected

in the timecode.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

PAL area

a) The composite signal output from this unit is an

NTSC signal with no black setup. The system

frequency is 59.94i.

b) The composite signal output from this unit is an

NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE). The

system frequency is 59.94i.

Display the TIME/DATE page of the

DIAGNOSIS menu, and press the

MENU knob.

c) The composite signal output from this unit is a

PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

attach the battery pack” on page 37.

Change the SYSTEM LINE (video

resolution) setting as required.

D02 TIME/DATE

ADJUST

TOP

: EXEC

Setting Resolution (horizontal × vertical)

1080

720

1080 lines (1920 × 1080)

720 lines (1280 × 720)

HOUR

MIN

SEC

Set the POWER switch to OFF, then

once again to ON.

The unit is now ready for use.

YEAR

MONTH

DAY

Press the MENU knob.

The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.

TIME ADJUST

ESC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

YEAR

MONTH

DAY

• HOUR: Sets the hour value.

• MIN: Sets the minutes value.

• SEC: Sets the seconds value.

• YEAR: Sets the year.

• MONTH: Sets the month.

• DAY: Sets the day.

Turn the MENU knob to move b to the

item you want to set, and press the

MENU knob.

b on the left of the selected item changes to

z and z on the left of the setting changes to

Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turn the MENU knob to display the

desired value, and press the MENU

knob.

Mounting the Lens

z changes to b and ? changes to z.

To continue the remaining settings,

repeat steps 3 and 4.

First power off the camcorder, and then mount the

lens using the following procedure.

When you finish settings, turn the

MENU knob to move b to “OK”, then

press the MENU knob.

The internal clock is set with the date and

time set in steps 3 to 5. The TIME/DATE

page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears

again. The time set on the TIME ADJUST

setting window is displayed.

For information about using the lens, refer to the

operation manual for the lens.

Lens mount

securing rubber

To cancel the setting

Before executing step 6, move b to “ESC” at the

top right of the window and press the MENU

knob.

Alternatively, flick the CANCEL/PRST/

ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side.

All settings or changes are discarded and the

TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu

appears.

5 4

Push the lens locking lever up and

remove the lens mount cap from the

lens mount.

Align the center pin on the lens with the

center slot in the lens mount, and insert

the lens into the mount.

Holding the lens in place, push the lens

locking lever down to lock the lens.

Caution

If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off

while the camcorder is being used. This could cause

a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly

locked. It is recommended that the lens mount

Mounting the Lens

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as

illustrated above.

Adjusting the Flange

Focal Length

Connect the lens cable to the LENS

connector.

Secure the lens cable with the cable

clamps.

If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you

zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the

flange focal length (the distance from the plane of

the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).

Make this adjustment after mounting or changing

the lens.

The position of the controls for adjusting the flange

focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check

the identification of the various controls in the lens

manual.

About 3 m (10 ft)

Set the iris to manual.

Open the iris. Place the flange focal

length adjustment chart about 3 m (10

ft) away from the camera, lit well

enough to provide a satisfactory video

output level.

Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or

F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment

ring).

Use manual or power zoom to set the

lens to telephoto.

Point the camera at the chart by turning

the focus ring and focus on it.

Set the zoom ring to wide angle.

Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart

is in focus, being careful not to disturb

the focus ring.

Adjusting the Flange Focal Length

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays

in focus all the way from wide angle to

telephoto.

Preparing the Audio

Input System

Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing

screws.

Connecting a microphone to the

MIC IN connector

You can attach the ECM-680S stereo microphone

(not supplied) to the microphone holder of the

HDVF-20A viewfinder (not supplied).

Loosen the screw and open the

microphone holder clamp.

Microphone holder clamp

Place the microphone in the

microphone holder.

1 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet

type, supplied with the ECM-680S)

around the microphone, while peeling

off the protective sheets on both sides

of the microphone spacer.

2 Place the microphone in the holder so

that “UP” is at the top.

3 Close the microphone holder.

4 Tighten the screw.

Preparing the Audio Input System

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following is the procedure for attaching an

electret condenser microphone such as the ECM-

674/678.

On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation

manual for the CAC-12.

Attach the electret condenser

microphone.

1 Loosen the ball joint lock lever.

2 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet

type, supplied with the microphone)

around the microphone, while peeling

off the protective sheets on both sides

of the microphone spacer.

3 Place the microphone in the holder so

that “UP” is at the top.

4 Close the microphone holder.

5 Tighten the screw.

On how to perform this operation, refer to the

operation manual for the microphone.

6 Position so that the microphone does

not interfere with the viewfinder and

tighten the ball joint lock lever.

When attaching the ECM-674/678, use the

microphone adaptor supplied with the CAC-

12 Microphone Holder.

Plug the microphone cable into the MIC

IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN

switch for the channel on which you

want to record the audio from this

microphone to FRONT (for CH-1/

CH-2) or F (for CH-3/CH-4).

Microphone

Secure the microphone cable with the

cable clamps.

Connecting microphones to the

AUDIO IN connectors

You can connect up to two monaural

microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2

connectors, using a CAC-12 Microphone Holder

(not supplied).

Preparing the Audio Input System

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,

with the REAR XLR AUTO item.

Connect the microphone cable to the

AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.

Notes

Set the switches as follows.

Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector to

MIC.

• Set the +48V/OFF switch indicated below,

depending on the power supply type of the

microphone.

Internal power supply: Set the +48V/OFF

switch to OFF.

External power supply: Set the +48V/

OFF switch to +48V.

• If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate

setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud sounds

may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio may be

affected.

• In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors

on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V

power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are

fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector,

use an adaptor.

• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once

you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to

lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1).

After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two

screws back into their original places.

• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-

4) switch for the channel to which the

microphone is connected to REAR (for

CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4).

Attaching a UHF portable tuner

(for a UHF wireless microphone

system)

To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system,

fit one of the following UHF portable tuners.

• DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver

• WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit

• WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized

Diversity Tuner

For details of these units, refer to the operation

manuals for them.

1 +48V/OFF switch

2 Monaural microphone

3 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches

To fit the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S

4 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector

Remove the four fixing screws holding

the cover of the portable tuner/receiver

housing slot located in the rear of this

unit, to remove the cover.

Switch the input level to match the

sensitivity of the microphone used.

Switch the input level by changing the REAR

MIC REF setting on the AUDIO-1 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu (factory default setting

is –60 dB). For details, see page 177.

XLR connection automatic detection function

With the XLR connection automatic detection

function being on, when a cable is connected to

the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input

from that connector is automatically selected for

audio recording, regardless of the setting of the

AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.

Insert the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S

into the housing slot, and fasten the four

fixing screws.

The XLR connection automatic detection

function can be switched on or off on the

Preparing the Audio Input System

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pack to be attached, and tighten the

adjustment screws to fix its position.

4 Attach the mount plate supplied with

the WRR-862.

DWR-S01D or WRR-855S

About the WRR tuner fitting (service part

number: A-8278-057-B), contact a Sony service

or sales representative.

BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S

Set the AUDIO IN switch for the

channel to which you want to input

audio signal to WIRELESS (see page

28).

Adjustment

screws

Mount plate

(supplied with

WRR-862)

Notes

• When the XLR connection automatic detection

function is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2

switch is set to WIRELESS, the signal input to the

AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is automatically

selected when an audio cable is connected to the

AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. In such a case, set

REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of

the MAINTENANCE menu. (The factory default

setting is OFF.)

Phillips type

screwdriver

Attach the battery pack.

On how to attach the battery pack, see “To

• When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to

LINE or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio

channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR

automatic detection function. They are determined by

the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4

switches.

Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner

fitting.

To fit the WRR-862 (when using a BP-

GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack)

Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not

supplied; service part number: A-8278-

057-B) to the back of the camcorder.

WRR-862

1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to

tighten the four screws placed in the

tuner fitting. For three of these screws,

insert the screwdriver through the

corresponding hole and tighten the

screw.

Connect the tuner power cord to the DC

OUT connector of the camcorder, and

the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN

CH1 or CH2 connector.

Set the switches as follows.

Note

• Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector for

the channel to which the audio output cable

is attached to MIC.

Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened.

2 Loosen the adjustment screws on the

tuner fitting.

3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a

BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery

• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-

4) switch for the channel to which the audio

output cable is connected to REAR (for

CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4).

Preparing the Audio Input System

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the XLR connection automatic detection

function is on, the input signal for audio

recording is selected automatically, and

therefore this setting is not required.

AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,

with the REAR XLR AUTO item.

1 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches

2 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector

3 Audio equipment

4 LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors

1AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches

2To DC OUT connector

3To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector

4LINE / AES/EBU /MIC selectors

Connecting line input audio

equipment

Connect the audio output connector of the audio

equipment that supplies the line input signal to the

AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.

Switch settings

Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector for the

channel to which the audio signal source is

connected to LINE.

Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded

• With the XLR connection automatic detection

function being off (the factory default setting):

A signal must be selected for audio recording by

setting the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to

REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN

CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for connecting

the external audio equipment.

• With the XLR connection automatic detection

function being on: When a cable is connected to

the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the

input from that connector is automatically

selected for audio recording, regardless of the

setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.

The XLR connection automatic detection

function can be switched on or off on the

Preparing the Audio Input System

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tripod Mounting

Attach the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not

supplied) to the tripod.

Red button

Lever

Tripod adaptor

Note

The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged

position even after the camcorder is removed. If this

happens, press the red button against the lever a second

time and move the lever as shown above until the pin

returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the

engaged position, you will not be able to mount the

camcorder on the tripod adaptor.

Camera mount

Mount the camcorder on the tripod

adaptor.

Slide the camcorder forward along the

groove in the adaptor until it clicks.

To remove the camcorder from the tripod

adaptor

Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the

direction of the arrow.

Tripod Mounting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting a Video

Light

Using the Shoulder

Strap

With this camcorder, you can use the Anton

Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light

(powered by 12 V with maximum power

consumption of 50 W).

• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT

connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT

switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and

off automatically as you start and stop the VDR

operation.

To attach the shoulder strap

Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap

fitting.

Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.

• The output of the LIGHT connector on the

camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the

camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power

(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).

The brightness or color temperature of the light

will not change according to voltage increase.

Clip

Notes

• Do not use a video light with power consumption of

over 50 W.

• The brightness or color temperature of the light will

change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN

connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.

Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap

fitting on the other side of the grip in the

same way as in step 1.

To attach the video light

Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on

the camcorder grip, and connect the video light

cable to the LIGHT connector.

Note

The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the 1/4-inch

tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slide-

type shoe, contact a Sony service representative.

Connecting a Video Light / Using the Shoulder Strap

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To remove the shoulder strap

Adjusting the Shoulder

Pad Position

Press here and pull in the direction

shown by the arrow to release.

You can shift the shoulder pad from its center

position (the factory default setting) backward by

up to 10 mm ( / inch) or forward by up to 25 mm

(1 inch). This adjustment helps you get the best

balance for shooting with the camcorder on your

shoulder.

1,3

Shoulder pad

Raise the lever in the center of the

shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder

pad.

Slide the shoulder pad backward or

forward until it is in the most

convenient position.

Bring down the lever to lock the

shoulder pad in the selected position.

Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800), or RET button

on the lens)) (when the RM REC START item

on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the

Connecting the Remote

Control Unit

MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM)

[700]

• Buttons to which the COLOR TEMP SW

3200K/4300K/5600K/ 6300K functions have

been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches,

COLOR TEMP. button, and RET button on the

lens)

Note

Before connecting/disconnecting a remote control unit

to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn the power of the

camcorder off.

Paint adjustment when the remote

control unit is connected

The settings of the paint adjustment that were in

effect the last time the remote control unit was

used are recalled.

Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control

Unit enables remote control of the principal

camera functions.

Connecting the remote control unit to the

REMOTE connector (8-pin) automatically puts

the camcorder into remote control mode. If you

disconnect the remote control unit, the remote

control mode is cancelled.

Function of the recording start/stop

buttons when the remote control unit is

connected

When the remote control unit is connected, you

can make a setting to determine which of the

recording start/stop buttons you will use. This

setting is made using the RM REC START item

on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

Relationship between the setting of the RM REC

START item and the function of recording start/

stop buttons

1 RM-B150/B750

2 Remote control cable

3 REMOTE connector

Recording start/

stop button

Settings of RM REC

START

CAM

PARA

Camcorder switch functions when the

remote control unit is connected

Camcorder’s REC Disabled Enabled Enabled

START button

The following switches on the camcorder do not

function.

• GAIN selector

• OUTPUT/DCC switch

• WHITE BAL switch

Lens VTR button

Disabled Enabled Enabled

Button to which the Disabled Enabled Enabled

recording start/stop

function has been

assigned

(camcorder

ASSIGN 1/3/4

switch, COLOR

TEMP. button

(PDW-700),

ASSIGN 5 switch

(PDW-F800), or

RET button on the

lens)

• AUTO W/B BAL switch

• SHUTTER selector

• Button to which the TURBO SWITCH function

has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch,

COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5

switch (PDW-F800), or RET button on the lens)

• REC START button (and the VTR button on the

lens, and the button to which the recording start/

stop function has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4

switch, COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-700),

Connecting the Remote Control Unit

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording start/

stop button

Settings of RM REC

START

Setup menu of the

camcorder

RM-B150

CAM

PARA

Remote control

unit’s VTR button

Enabled Disabled Enabled

Independent

data region

Remote control

data region

MASTER BLACK

MASTER GAMMA

KNEE POINT

DETAIL LEVEL

R/B GAIN

When the monitor is connected to the

MONITOR OUT connector of the remote

control unit

The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the

RM-B150/B750 outputs the same signal as that

from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder.

Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/

B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR

connector on the RM-B150/B750.

MASTER BLACK

MASTER GAMMA

KNEE POINT

DETAIL LEVEL

R/B GAIN

R/B BLACK

Non-volatile memory

When the remote control unit is

disconnected from the camcorder

The camcorder settings return to the settings in

effect before the remote control unit was

connected.

Hardware of the

camera section

RM-B150 connected

RM-B150 not connected

Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to

the camcorder, the effective data region is

switched to the “remote control data region” and

the settings of the paint adjustment that were in

effect the last time the remote control unit was

used are recalled.

Structure of the paint adjustment data

The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used

for storing paint adjustment data consists of two

regions as shown below: one is the “independent

data region” that is used when a remote control

unit is not connected, and the other is the “remote

control data region” that is used when a remote

control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is

automatically selected and output to the camera

section depending on whether or not a remote

control unit such as the RM-B150 is connected.

The settings of the absolute value rotational

controls and absolute value switches are

overwritten by those on the remote control unit

after the remote control unit is connected.

When the remote control unit is disconnected

from the camcorder, the “independent data

region” becomes effective. Thus the camcorder

will return to the settings that were in effect

before the remote control unit was connected.

1) Absolute value rotational controls: The data

corresponding to the angular position of controls is

output. Rotational controls for which the data

corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output

are called relative value controls.

2) Absolute value switches: Like toggle switches or

slide switches (except momentary switches), the

switches (or knobs) whose positions must coincide

with their functions are called absolute value switches.

When RM COMMON MEMORY is set to “ON”

on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, you can use settings of

the paint adjustment data stored in the

independent data region even if you connect the

remote control unit. In this case, the settings

Connecting the Remote Control Unit

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

stored in the independent data region will be

renewed when you change the settings on the

remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint

data made with the remote control unit can be

retained even if the remote control unit is

removed. However, if the switch position on the

remote control unit differs from the one on the

camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder

takes precedence over that on the remote control

unit.

Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in

effect before you connect the remote control unit.

In this case, you should set the control knob to the

relative value mode on the remote control unit.

For details, refer to the operation manual supplied

with the remote control unit.

Connecting the Remote Control Unit

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting

b) When the video recording format is set to MPEG IMX

50/40/30.

Setting the Recording

Format

c) When the video recording format is set to MPEG

HD420 HQ/SP or DVCAM.

Notes

• It is not possible to combine material recorded in

different frame frequency groups on single disc (see

page 58).

The recording formats supported by this

camcorder are as follows.

• This unit can record up to four channels of audio. If

you select a format with eight channels of audio,

silence is recorded in channels 5 to 8.

Video

Recording format

Resolution System

frequency

Setting the system frequency

MPEG HD422 50

(Bit rate: 50 Mbps)

1080

59.94i/29.97P/

50i/25P/

23.98P

Display the FORMAT page of the

OPERATION menu.

720

59.94P/50P

59.94i/29.97P/

50i/25P/

024 FORMAT

TOP

MPEG HD420 HQ/ 1080

(Bit rate: 35/25

SYSTEM LINE

SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 59.9i

1080

23.98P

Mbps)

720

59.94P/50P

59.94i/29.97P

50i/25P

REC FORMAT

HD422 50

MPEG IMX 50/40/ 525

625

COUNTRY

: NTSC(J)AREA

(Bit rate: 50/40/30

Mbps)

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

525

625

59.94i/29.97P

50i/25P

DVCAM

(Bit rate: 25 Mbps)

Select SYSTEM FREQUENCY, and

turn the MENU knob to select the

desired system frequency.

You can select the frequency shown below

depending on the combination of the

COUNTRY and SYSTEM LINE settings.

a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P: When the area of use is set to

NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC AREA.

50i/25P/50P: When the area of use is set to PAL

AREA.

23.98P: For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZ-

FC01 23.98P Record and Playback Software is

installed.

b) For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZ-MD01

SD Record and Playback Software is installed.

COUNTRY

SYSTEM SYSTEM

LINE FREQUENCY

NTSC(J)AREA 1080

NTSC AREA

720

59.9i/29.9P/

23.98P

59.9P

Audio

Recording format

Number of channels

PAL AREA

1080

720

50i/25P

50P

24bit/48kHz

8 channels

4 channels

16bit/48kHz

8 channels

• Change the COUNTRY or SYSTEM LINE

setting as required.

4 channels

• When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and

SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59.9P,

you can set the camera shooting frequency

a) When the video recording format is set to MPEG

HD422 50.

Setting the Recording Format

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(SCAN MODE) to either 59.9 Hz or 23.9

Hz. Set SCAN MODE to either as required.

Mixed recording of clips in

different formats on the same disc

Note

When you set SCAN MODE to 23.9P, the video

output signals and video recording signals of this

unit are 59.9 Hz signals after 2-3 pulldown.

As long as the frame frequency group is the same,

clips in different recording formats can be

recorded or written to the same disc.

In this manual, this is referred to as “mixed format

recording mode”.

1) The recording format is regarded as different

whenever the system frequency, video resolution,

video codec/bit rate, or number of audio channels or

number of bits does not match.

Setting the video recording format

Display the FORMAT page of the

OPERATION menu.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Notes

• Regardless of frame frequency group matching,

it is not possible to mix clips with different

video resolutions (number of system lines) in

the same clip list.

Select REC FORMAT, and turn the

MENU knob to select the desired

recording format.

As you turn the MENU knob, the recording

• When the unit is in a mode that calls for

playback across clips that were recorded in

different recording formats, video and audio

playback may stop at the point where the format

changes from one format into another, and then

start again.

format changes as follows: HD422 50 y

HD420 HQ y HD420 SP y IMX 50

y IMX 40 y IMX 30

DVCAM

1) When the optional CBKZ-MD01 SD Record and

Playback Software is installed.

Frame frequency groups

To set the aspect ratio (when IMX 50, IMX 40,

IMX 30, or DVCAM is selected)

Select ASPECT RATIO(SD) on the FORMAT

page, and turn the MENU knob to select the

desired aspect ratio.

The system frequencies supported by this unit are

divided into frame frequency groups, as shown in

the following table.

Frame frequency group

System frequency

59.94 Hz

59.94P

59.94i

29.97P

50P

As you turn the MENU knob, the aspect ratio

changes as follows: 16:9 y 4:3.

024 FORMAT

TOP

50 Hz

SYSTEM LINE

SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 59.9i

1080

50i

25P

REC FORMAT

ASPECT RATIO(SD):

AU DATA LEN(IMX): 16bit

IMX 50

16:9

23.98 Hz

23.98P

You can record clips with different recording

formats, for example HD422 and HD420SP clips,

by putting this unit into mixed format recording

mode.

COUNTRY

: NTSC(J)AREA

Note

The unit ignores this setting when it records video from

external devices (see page 103).

To enable mixed format recording mode

Set MIXED RECORDING on the CAM

CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu

to “ENABL”.

To set the audio recording format (when IMX 50,

IMX 40, or IMX 30 is selected)

Select AU DATA LEN(IMX) on the FORMAT

page or AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, and turn the MENU knob to select the

desired audio recording format.

As you turn the MENU knob, the audio recording

format changes as follows: 16bit y 24bit.

If you want to disable mixing of clips with

different recording formats, leave this item set to

“DSABL”. However, regardless of the mixed

format recording mode setting, it is always

Setting the Recording Format

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

possible to mix clips in the following format

groups.

• HD420 HQ, SP, and LP

• 1080/59.94i and 1080/29.97P

• 1080/50i and 1080/25P

Adjusting the Black

Balance and the White

Balance

To ensure excellent image quality when using this

camcorder, conditions may require that both the

black balance and the white balance be adjusted.

Black balance adjustment

The black balance will require adjustment in the

following cases.

• When the camcorder is used for the first time

• When the camcorder has not been used for a

long time

• When the camcorder is used under conditions in

which the surrounding temperature has changed

greatly

• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have

been changed by using the USER menu

It is not usually necessary to adjust the black

balance when using the camcorder after it has

been off.

White balance adjustment

Always readjust the white balance when the

lighting conditions change.

Viewfinder screen displays

If the black balance or white balance adjustment

is started, messages that report on the progress

and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen

when the VF DISP MODE item is set to “2” or

“3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.

Note

Black balance and white balance adjustment values that

are automatically set by the camcorder and the various

settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained

even when the power is turned off.

Adjusting the black balance

In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are

performed in the following order: black set and

black balance. Manual black balance adjustment

can be selected from the setup menu.

For details of manual black balance adjustment,

refer to the Maintenance Manual.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Possible messages are listed below.

Error message

ABB : NG

IRIS NOT CLOSE

Meaning

The lens iris did not close;

adjustment was

impossible.

ABB : NG

TIME LIMIT

Adjustment could not be

completed within the

standard number of

attempts.

ABB : NG

R (or G or B) :

OVERFLOW

The difference between the

reference value and the

current value is so great

that it exceeds the range.

Adjustment was

1 OUTPUT/DCC switch

2 AUTO W/B BAL switch

Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.

impossible.

Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to

BLK and release the switch.

The switch returns to the center position, and

the adjustment is executed.

During adjustment, the following message is

displayed on the viewfinder screen.

If any of the above error messages is displayed,

retry the black balance adjustment.

Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL switch to

BLK until “-BLACK SET-” appears after

“-BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error

message occurs again, an internal check is

necessary.

For information about this internal check, refer to

the Maintenance Manual.

Note

ABB:EXECUTING

BLACK SET

If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS

connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris.

If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.

The messages change in the following

sequence :

BLACK SET

Black balance memory

Values stored in memory are held until the black

balance is next adjusted.

BLACK BALANCE

The black balance adjustment ends in a few

seconds with the message “ABB:OK” and

the adjustment value is automatically stored

in memory.

If a memory error occurs

If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG”

flashes on the viewfinder screen when the

camcorder is turned on, the black balance and

white balance memory contents have been lost.

Adjust the black balance and white balance again.

Contact a Sony representative if this message

continues to appear even after the black balance

and white balance have been adjusted again.

Notes

• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is

automatically closed.

• During the black balance adjustment, the gain

selection circuit is automatically activated so you may

see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not

a fault.

For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.

If automatic black balance adjustment

cannot be made

Adjusting the white balance

If the black balance adjustment cannot be

completed normally, an error message will appear

for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen.

Set the switches and selectors as shown

in the figure below.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Place a white test card under the same

lighting conditions as for the subject to

be shot and zoom up to it.

Alternatively, any white object such as a

cloth or a wall can be used.

The absolute minimum white area is as

follows.

Rectangle centered on the screen. The

lengths of the sides are 70% of the length

and width of the screen.

2 34

1 FILTER selector

2 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.

3 OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM

The white object must be within the

rectangle and have an area of at least 10%

of the screen.

4 WHITE BAL switch: A or B ^a)

a)White balance setting values are stored in

memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH

item is set to “MEM” on the WHITE SETTING

page of the OPERATION menu.

Note

Make sure there are not bright spots in the

rectangle.

Adjust the lens iris.

Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an

appropriate setting.

Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/

manual switch on the lens to automatic.

If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE

BAL switch is changed, a message reporting

the new setting position appears for about 3

seconds in the setting change and adjustment

progress message display area of the

viewfinder screen.

Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to

WHT and then release the switch.

Set the FILTER selector to suit the

lighting conditions as follows.

The possible settings of the FILTER selector

and their corresponding filters to be selected

are listed below.

FILTER selector (inner knob) ND filter

setting

CLEAR

/ ND

AUTO W/B BAL switch

The switch returns to the center position, and

the adjustment is executed.

If the setting of the FILTER selector is

changed, a message reporting the setting

appears for about 3 seconds in the setting

change and adjustment progress message

display area of the viewfinder screen (in

display mode 3).

During adjustment, the message

“AWB:EXECUTING WHITE BALANCE”

is displayed on the viewfinder screen (in

display mode 2 or 3).

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The white balance adjustment ends in about

one second with the message shown in the

following figure, and the adjustment setting

is automatically stored in the memory (A or

B) that was selected in step 1.

Error message

WHITE : NG

LOW LEVEL

Meaning

The white video level is

too low. Either open the

lens iris or increase the

gain.

WHITE : NG

COLOR TEMP

HIGH

The color temperature is

too high.

WHITE : NG

COLOR TEMP LOW too low.

The color temperature is

AWB:OK

. K

WHITE : NG

TIME LIMIT

Adjustment could not be

completed within the

standard number of

attempts.

Approximate color temperature

of the subject

WHITE : NG

POOR WHITE

AREA

The white area could not

be checked.

Note

If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,

the iris may hunt ¹⁾during the adjustment. To

prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as

IG, IS, or S) on the lens.

WHITE : NG

OVER LEVEL

The white video level is

too high. Either stop down

the lens iris or change the

ND filter.

For details, refer to the lens operation manual.

If any of the above error messages is displayed,

retry the white balance adjustment. If the error

message occurs again, an internal check is

necessary.

1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of

the image, resulting from repeated response to

automatic iris control.

If the automatic white balance adjustment

cannot be made

For information about this internal check, refer to

the Maintenance Manual.

If the white balance adjustment cannot be

completed normally, an error message will appear

for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen.

Possible messages are listed below.

If you have no time to adjust the white

balance

Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.

For the PDW-700, this makes it possible to

automatically set the white balance to 5600K

(factory default value) by pressing the COLOR

TEMP. button.

The color temperature to which the white balance

is set when the COLOR TEMP. button is pressed

can be selected from among 3200K, 4300K,

5600K, and 6300K on the ASSIGNABLE SW

page of the OPERATION menu. You can also

assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN 1/3/4

switches and the RET button on the lens.

For details of automatic white balance adjustment,

see page 60.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1) When the RM-B150/B750, MSU-900/950, or RCP-

750/751/920/921 is connected.

[700]

To change the color temperature when

the ND filter is switched

You can assign electrical CC (color correction)

filters to ND filters (see page 17). This allows you

to change the color temperature automatically

when the ND filter is switched.

Display the WHITE FILTER page of

the MAINTENANCE menu.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

menu operations” on page 193

Select the position to which to assign a

CC filter by selecting one of

Display the WHITE FILTER page of

the MAINTENANCE menu.

“ELECTRICAL CC<A>” to

“ELECTRICAL CC <D>”, and then

turn the MENU knob to select the

desired color temperature.

As you turn the MENU knob, the color

temperature changes as follows: 3200K y

4300K y 5600K y 6300K.

M15 WHITE FILTER

TOP

ND FILTER CTEMP :

ND FLT CTEMP <1>: 3200K

ND FLT CTEMP 2-4: 5600K

OFF

ELECTRICAL CC<A>: 3200K

ELECTRICAL CC: 4300K

ELECTRICAL CC<C>: 5600K

ELECTRICAL CC<D>: 6300K

To set no color temperature

Select “-----” with ELECTRICAL CC<C> or

<D> selected.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

When the ASSIGN switch is pressed, the

setting for that position is not displayed. For

example, if “-----” is set for one position, then

switching between the remaining three

positions is carried out.

Select ND FILTER CTEMP, and turn

the MENU knob to display “ON”.

To assign an electrical CC filter to

FILTER selector position number 1,

select “ND FLT CTEMP <1>”. To

assign it to positions 2 to 4, select “ND

FLT CTEMP 2-4”.

Repeat step 2 as required.

Assign the electrical CC filter switching

function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an

ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch, the COLOR

TEMP button, or the RET button on the

lens (see page 209).

Turn the MENU knob to display the

desired color temperature.

As you turn the MENU knob, the color

temperature changes as follows: 3200K y

4300K y 5600K y 6300K.

White balance memory

Values stored in memory are held until the white

balance is next adjusted.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.

There are two sets of white balance memories, A

and B, and adjustments for each of the CC filters

(PDW-F800) or ND filters (PDW-700) can be

automatically stored in the memory

[700]

To switch between electrical CC filters

with an ASSIGN switch

corresponding to the setting (A or B) of the

WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four

built-in CC filters (PDW-F800) or ND filters

(PDW-700), so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments

can be stored. However, the memory contents are

not linked to the CC filter (PDW-F800) or ND

filter (PDW-700) settings in the following cases.

• For the PDW-700, when the number of

memories allocated to each of A and B is

limited to one by setting the FILTER WHT

You can assign the function that switches

between electrical CC filters to an ASSIGN

switch. This allows you to switch between color

temperatures (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that

have been assigned to up to four positions (A to

D) with each press of the ASSIGN switch.

Regardless of assignments to ASSIGN switches,

you can also switch between the color

temperatures assigned to each position from a

remote control unit.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEM item on the WHITE SETTING page of

the OPERATION menu to OFF.

• When the electrical CC filter switching function

has been assigned to an ASSIGN switch, or

when a remote control unit has been connected.

(In these cases, the contents of white balance

memory are linked to electrical CC filter

positions (A to D).)

ATW HOLD MEMORY: OFF

If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the

WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION

menu, the WHITE SWITCH item is set to

“ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)”, the ATW

function is activated to automatically adjust the

white balance of the picture being shot for

varying lighting conditions.

ATW: ON

ATW: OFF

a) White balance settings stored in memory

A, B, or C

To save white balance settings obtained by ATW

Set ATW HOLD MEMORY in the WHITE

SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to

“ON”. When this is done, auto white balance

settings obtained by ATW are written to the

memory corresponding to the setting (A or B) that

is currently selected with the WHITE BAL

ATW HOLD MEMORY: ON

switch.

You can then turn ATW off and continue

shooting with the current white balance values.

ATW: ON

ATW: OFF

b) White balance settings immediately

before ATW was turned off.

The unit continues to use the values that were in

effect immediately before ATW was turned off.

1) This function is not available when the WHITE BAL

switch is set to PRST. If you have connected a remote

control unit, the unit uses the memory corresponding

to the remote control unit setting (A, B, or C).

White balance settings used when ATW is turned

off

(WB: White balance setting value, t: Shooting

time)

If a memory error occurs

If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG”

flashes on the viewfinder screen when the

camcorder is turned on, the white balance and

black balance memory contents have been lost.

Adjust the white balance and black balance again.

Contact a Sony representative if this message

continues to appear even after the white balance

and black balance have been adjusted again.

For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode

Select this mode for obtaining images with no

horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects

such as monitor screens.

Setting the Electronic

Shutter

SYSTEM

LINE setting

1080

System

frequency

59.94i

Shutter speed

(unit: Hz)

60.00 to 4300

50.00 to 4700

30.00 to 2700

50i

Shutter modes

29.97P

The shutter modes that can be used with the

electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can

be selected are listed below.

25.00 to 2300

24.00 to 2200

60.00 to 4300

25P

23.98P

720

59.94P

(SCAN

MODE:

59.9P)

59.94P

(SCAN

MODE:

23.9P)

50P

Standard mode

Select this mode for shooting fast-moving

subjects with little blurring.

24.00 to 2200

SYSTEM

System

Shutter speed (unit:

LINE setting frequency seconds)

1080

59.94i

50i

100 125 250

50.00 to 4700

500 1000 2000

a) When the unit is in Slow & Quick Motion mode and

FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page of the

OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater

than the system frequency, the lower limits for shutter

speed settings are as shown below.

29.97P: 60.00Hz

60 125 250

500 1000 2000

29.97P

60 120

, / , / , /

125 250 500 1000

25P: 50.00Hz

23.98P: 48.00Hz

2000

25P

50 100

SLS (slow speed shutter) mode

Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level

lighting conditions.

, / , / , /

125 250 500 1000

2000

23.98P

48 50 60

SYSTEM LINE

setting

Shutter speed (unit:

frames)

96 125 250

1080

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16

2, 4, 6, 8, 16

500 1000 2000

720

59.94P

(SCAN

MODE:

59.9P)

100 125 250

Notes

500 1000 2000

• SLS mode cannot be selected when SCAN

MODE is set to 23.9P.

• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic

shutter, the sensitivity of the CCD decreases

with increasing shutter speed.

• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens

wider as the shutter speed increases, thus

reducing the depth of field.

59.94P

(SCAN

MODE:

23.9P)

32 48 50 60

96 125 250

500 1000 2000

50P

60 125 250

500 1000 2000

a) This speed cannot be selected when the unit is in Slow

& Quick Motion mode and FRAME RATE on the

REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu is

set to a value that is greater than the system frequency.

• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or

mercury lamps, the light intensity may appear to

be constant, but the red, green, and blue

intensities are actually changing in

synchronization with the frequency of the

Setting the Electronic Shutter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

power supply causing flicker. Using an

electronic shutter under such lighting could

make the flicker even worse. Color flicker is

particularly likely to happen when the power

supply frequency is 60 Hz. However, if the

201 to set the VF DISPLAY MODE

item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1

page of the USER menu.

Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON

to SELECT.

The current shutter setting indication appears

for about 3 seconds in the setting change and

adjustment progress message display area of

the viewfinder screen.

power frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter

speed to / can reduce this flicker.

100

• When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in

such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper

edge of the picture may have poor quality

because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs.

Before using ECS mode, check the shooting

conditions.

Examples: “: SS : 1/250”, “: ECS : 60.0 Hz”

Before the shutter setting indication

disappears, flick the SHUTTER

selector down to SELECT again and

repeat this until the desired mode or

speed appears.

• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on

the current system frequency.

Selecting the shutter mode and

shutter speed

When all modes and speeds are displayed,

the display changes in the following order.

Standard mode (with system frequency: 59.94i)

Switching the shutter mode, and the shutter

speed in standard mode: Repeatedly flick

the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side

(see the next section).

SLS mode

ECS mode

Switching the shutter speed in ECS mode and

SLS mode: Select ECS mode or SLS mode

with the SHUTTER selector, and then turn

the MENU knob (see page 66).

If you have changed the configuration, only

the selected modes and speeds appear.

• When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is

configured to display all of the modes and

speeds in “Shutter modes” on page 65, except

SLS mode. You can change this configuration

by selecting only the required modes and

speeds on the SHT ENABLE page of the

OPERATION menu (see page 161).

• Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be

switched to angle display by using SHT DISP

MODE in the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu (see page 182).

MENU knob

SHUTTER selector

To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS

mode

You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the

OPERATION menu to narrow the range of

choice in advance, or to select in advance whether

or not you use ECS or SLS.

Set the shutter speed mode to ECS or

SLS (see the previous item).

To set the shutter mode and standard-

mode shutter speed

Turn the MENU knob to select the

desired frequency or number of frames.

Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained

even when the camcorder power is turned off.

When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is

connected

You can set the shutter speed of ECS or SLS with

the rotary encoder of the RM-B150.

Follow the procedure described in

“Selecting the display items” on page

Setting the Electronic Shutter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

camcorder appears along the top and bottom

of the screen.

To change the range of choice of shutter

mode and speed settings

You can reduce the time required to select the

shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice

of settings in advance. This can be done by using

the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION

menu.

[F800]

To set the shutter speed in degree units

On the SHUTTER SELECT page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, you can specify degrees

(angle of opening of the shutter) to select the

shutter speed in standard shutter mode.

Note

The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the

OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B150

or another remote control unit is connected to the

camcorder.

Note

When you enable degree settings, the unit disables all

items on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION

menu except SHUTTER ECS and SHUTTER SLS.

Display the SHT ENABLE page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

Display the SHUTTER SELECT page

of the MAINTENANCE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

022 SHT ENABLE

Select SHUTTER SELECT, and turn

the MENU knob to display DEGREE.

SHUTTER ECS

SHUTTER SLS

OFF

SHUTTER 1/100

SHUTTER 1/125

SHUTTER 1/250

SHUTTER 1/500

SHUTTER 1/1000

SHUTTER 1/2000

M24 SHUTTER SELECT

TOP

SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE

ADD: ---.-

DEL:

DEGREE

1: 216.0

2: 180.0

3: 90.0

4: 45.0

5: 22.5

6: 11.2

SECOND

1/99.85

1/119.7

1/239.0

1/475.0

1/940.0

1/1880

Turn the MENU knob to move b to the

shutter mode or shutter speed you want,

then press the MENU knob.

b on the left of the selected item changes to

z and z on the left of the setting changes to

Six shutter speeds appear. A registered

shuttle angle appears in the DEGREE field of

each line. A shutter speed (exposure time, in

units of seconds) appears in the SECOND

field, as calculated by converting from the

selected frame rate.

Each time that you flick the SHUTTER

selector to the SELECT side, the setting or

mode changes in the following order. (SLS

mode and ECS mode appear only when they

are enabled on the SHT ENABLE page of the

OPERATION menu.)

Turn the MENU knob until ON

appears, then press the MENU knob.

z on the left of the selected item changes to

b and ? on the left of the setting changes to

To set another mode or speed, return to step

Note that only the shutter speeds set to “ON”

can be selected with the SHUTTER selector.

Example of standard mode display

(shutter degrees setting)

To end the menu operation, set the

MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close

the cover of the menu operating section.

The menu disappears from the screen and the

display indicating the current status of the

SLS mode

ECS mode

Setting the Electronic Shutter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To register user-defined settings

M24 SHUTTER SELECT

TOP

You can register up to six shutter angle settings.

If six settings are already registered, you must

delete one of the registered settings before

registering a new one.

SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE

ADD:?180.0

DEL:

DEGREE

*1: 216.0

2: 180.0

3: 45.0

4: 22.5

5: 11.2

6: ---.-

SECOND

1/99.85

1/119.7

1/475.0

1/940.0

1/1880

Rotate the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the DEL position, and then

press the MENU knob.

-------

The b mark changes into a z mark, and the

z mark changes into a ? mark.

Also, a * mark appears before the number.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

value to the right of the ? mark into the

shutter angle that you want to register,

and then press the MENU knob. (The

setting value can be selected over the

range 360.0 to 4.5.)

M24 SHUTTER SELECT

TOP

SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE

ADD: ---.-

DEL:?

The newly specified shutter angle is assigned

to a free slot in the list, and the list is sorted

in order of the setting values. (In the figure

below, the shutter angle “144.0” was added,

and then the list was sorted, so that the angle

“144.0” is registered as item number 3.

DEGREE

*1: 216.0

2: 180.0

3: 90.0

4: 45.0

5: 22.5

6: 11.2

SECOND

1/99.85

1/119.7

1/239.0

1/475.0

1/940.0

1/1880

Turn the MENU knob to move the *

mark to the number of the shuttle angle

that you want to change, and then press

the MENU knob.

The selected setting is deleted. The numbers

of settings after the deleted setting are

incremented to bring them up to replace the

deleted setting. (The following example

shows the display after deletion of the setting

“90.0”, which had been registered as setting

number 3.)

M24 SHUTTER SELECT

TOP

SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE

ADD: ---.-

DEL:

DEGREE

*1: 216.0

2: 180.0

3: 144.0

4: 45.0

5: 22.5

6: 11.2

SECOND

1/99.85

1/119.7

1/150.0

1/475.0

1/940.0

1/1880

To add more user-defined settings

If there is no empty number in the list:

Repeat steps 1 to 4.

If there is an empty number in the list:

Repeat steps 3 and 4.

M24 SHUTTER SELECT

TOP

SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE

ADD: ---.-

DEL:

DEGREE

*1: 216.0

2: 180.0

3: 45.0

4: 22.5

5: 11.2

6: ---.-

Deleting unneeded settings

SECOND

When you are selecting shutter speeds, the

unit skips numbers that do not have assigned

settings. You will be able to select settings

more quickly if you delete settings that you

use only rarely. You must leave at least one

setting, but you can delete settings numbered

2 through 6.

1/99.85

1/119.7

1/475.0

1/940.0

1/1880

-------

Turn the MENU knob to move the b

mark to the ADD position, and press the

MENU knob.

The b mark changes into a z mark, and the

z mark changes into a ? mark.

Setting the Electronic Shutter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the

screen.

Changing the Reference

Value for Automatic Iris

Adjustment

Turn the MENU knob to change the

reference value.

Note

The reference value for automatic iris adjustment

can be changed to aid the shooting of clear

pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blown-

out highlights. The reference value for the lens

iris can be set within the following range with

respect to the standard value.

• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):

About 0.25 to 1 stop further open

• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):

About 0.25 to 1 stop further close

Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is

not ECS.

The changed reference value is retained until

the power of the camcorder is turned off.

Even if the reference value is changed, it

reverts to the standard value every time the

power is turned on.

To make the iris more open

Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as

seen from the front of the camera.

The iris stop indicators as shown in the

following table appear in the upper part to the

left of the F number in the iris indication.

Also you can set the area where light detection

occurs.

To change the reference value

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

Iris stop

Indicator

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

0.25

Display the AUTO IRIS page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

0.5

0.75

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

recording does not end normally (salvage

To stop down the iris

Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen

from the front of the camera.

016 AUTO IRIS

The iris stop indicators as shown in the

following table appear in the lower part to the

left of the F number in the iris indication.

Iris stop

Indicator

–0.25

–0.5

–0.75

–1

Check that the b mark is at the IRIS

OVERRIDE position, and then press

the MENU knob.

b on the left of the selected item changes to

z and z on the left of the setting changes to

Turn the MENU knob until “ON”

appears, then press the MENU knob.

z on the left of the selected item changes to

b and ? on the left of the setting changes to

The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON”.

Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turn the MENU knob to move b to

IRIS WINDOW, then press the MENU

knob.

b changes to z and z changes to ?.

Turn the MENU knob until the desired

auto iris window appears, then press the

MENU knob.

Opening the lens iris

Iris opened by 1

stop (two

segments)

Iris opened by 0.5

stop (one segment)

The shaded parts indicate the

area where light detection

z changes to b and ? changes to z.

Stopping down the lens iris

Iris stopped down

If you select “VARIABLE”, the following

items become effective and you can set the

window of the desired size. Set each item to

the desired size.

by 1 stop (two

segments)

Iris stopped down

by 0.5 stop (one

segment)

Item

Setting

IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the

window

IRIS VAR HEIGHT The height of the

window

When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is

connected

The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150 can be

used for lens iris setting. In this case, the indicator

is not displayed.

IRIS VAR H POS.

The position of the

window in the

horizontal direction

The position of the

window in the vertical

direction.

IRIS VAR V POS.

To set the automatic iris window

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The menu disappears from the screen and the

display indicating the current status of the

camcorder appears along the top and bottom

of the screen.

Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2

described in the previous item to

display the AUTO IRIS page.

Turn the MENU knob to move b to

IRIS WINDOW IND, then press the

MENU knob.

To counter problems with very bright

highlights

b on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND.

changes to z and z on the left of the setting

changes to ?.

If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too

much, leaving the overall image dark, or the

highlights may be blown out. In such cases,

setting the highlight clip function on reduces the

luminance range, avoiding problems from the

automatic iris correction.

Turn the MENU knob until ON

appears, then press the MENU knob.

z changes to b and ? changes to z.

The currently selected auto iris window

appears on the screen.

In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set

the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON.

If it is not necessary to display the auto iris

window on the screen, set to OFF.

Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the Audio

Level

Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2

switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input

levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio

channels 1 and 2. You can also adjust the audio

level manually.

LEVEL

CH-3

F-RUN

SET

R-RUN

AUTO

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

For audio channels 3 and 4, menu settings allow

you to select automatic adjustment, manual

adjustment, or fixed.

CH-1

CH-2

PRESET

AUDIO IN

CH-4

FRONT

REAR

WIRELESS

REGEN

CLOCK

MIC LEVEL

control

Target audio level for automatic audio level

adjustment

Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.

If the audio level meter shows a maximum level

of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level

is excessive.

To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO

IN CH1 or CH2 connector, set the

AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to

REAR.

To adjust both input signals, set both

switches to REAR.

Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)

corresponding to the channel(s) selected

in step 1 to MANUAL.

Excessive

input level

Target input

level

With the LEVEL control(s) for the

channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so

that the audio level meter shows up to

–20 dB for a normal input volume.

Manually adjusting the audio

levels of the audio inputs from the

AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors

Correspondence between recording level

adjustments and audio level controls

With the XLR connection automatic detection

function being on, when a cable is connected to

the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input

from these connectors is automatically selected

for audio recording. In this case, start the

operation from step 2.

On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, you can select which audio level control

controls the audio recording level of the input to

each of the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. The

correspondences between the settings of the menu

items and the controls are as follows.

You can turn on and off the XLR connection

automatic detection function on the AUDIO-1 page

of the MAINTENANCE menu.

REAR1/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level

of channel 1

Setting

SIDE1

FRONT

F+S1

Control

LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)

MIC LEVEL control

LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with

MIC LEVEL control.

Adjusting the Audio Level

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REAR2/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level

Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for

the desired channel(s) selected in step 1

to MANUAL.

of channel 2

Setting

SIDE2

FRONT

F+S2

Control

LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the right)

MIC LEVEL control

Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and

adjust so that the audio level meter

shows up to –20 dB for a normal input

volume.

LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with

MIC LEVEL control.

Note

Correspondence between recording level

adjustments and audio level controls

When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2)

controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the

MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on

channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position

of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL

(CH-1/CH-2) controls.

On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, you can select which audio level control

controls the audio recording level of the front

microphone input. The correspondences between

the settings of the menu items and the controls are

as follows.

Manually adjusting the audio

level of the MIC IN connector

MIC CH1 LEVEL: Audio recording level of

channel 1

Setting

SIDE1

FRONT

F+S1

Control

Note

LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)

MIC LEVEL control

If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on,

when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/

CH2 connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to

the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO

IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio

signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are

automatically selected.

LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with

MIC LEVEL control.

MIC CH2 LEVEL: Audio recording level of

channel 2

Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone,

confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN

CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR

AUTO item to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

Setting

Control

SIDE2

LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the

right)

FRONT

F+S2

MIC LEVEL control

LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with

MIC LEVEL control.

Note

When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control

and LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the

LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio

signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check

the position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before

adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.

LEVEL

CH-3

F-RUN

SET

R-RUN

AUTO

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

CH-1 CH-2

Recording audio on channels 3

and 4

PRESET

AUDIO IN

CH-4

FRONT

REAR

WIRELESS

REGEN

CLOCK

Selecting the recorded audio

You can select the audio recorded on audio

channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-

4 switches, or you can have the selection made

automatically, as follows.

Set either or both of the AUDIO IN

switch(es) to FRONT.

Adjusting the Audio Level

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To automatically select the same audio as on

channels 1 and 2

page of the MAINTENANCE menu to

FRONT.

On the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, set the AUDIO CH3/4 MODE item to “CH

1/2”.

The levels of audio channels 3 and 4 can now

be adjusted with the MIC LEVEL control.

To set to a fixed value

In step 2 of the previous procedure “To adjust

manually”, set the menu items to FIX.

CH-3 switch

1 F: The audio signal from the front

microphone is recorded.

2 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN

CH1 connector is recorded.

3 W: The audio signal of the wireless

microphone is recorded.

CH-4 switch

4 F: Same as with the CH3 switch.

5 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN

CH2 connector is recorded.

6 W: Same as with the CH3 switch.

Note

When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to LINE

or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3

and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection

function. They are determined by the settings of the

AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches.

Adjusting the audio recording levels

To adjust automatically

Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO-2 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu to STREO or MONO.

To adjust manually

Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the

AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu to OFF.

Set AUDIO CH3 LEVEL (for audio

channel 3) and AUDIO CH4 LEVEL

(for audio channel 4) on the AUDIO-3

Adjusting the Audio Level

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.

Setting the Time Data

Use the up and down arrow buttons to

change values, and use the left and right

arrow buttons to move the flashing

digit. Repeat until all digits are set.

To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00

Press the RESET/RETURN button.

Note

Breakup may occur in the camera video when the unit’s

format is set to SYSTEM LINE:720, SYSTEM

FREQUENCY: 59.9P, and SCAN MODE: 23.9P, and

DF/NDF on the TIMECODE page of the

MAINTENANCE menu is set to NDF. This may occur

when you do any of the following.

• Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK.

• Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.

• Sync lock the unit’s internal timecode generator to an

external generator (see page 75).

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

F-RUN or R-RUN.

F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator

keeps running.

R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode

generator runs only while recording.

To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame

mode

You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-

drop frame (NDF) mode on the TIMECODE page

of the MAINTENANCE menu.

Setting the timecode

To make the timecode consecutive

The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :

00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds :

frames).

When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to

R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the disc

normally produces consecutive timecode.

However, once you remove the disc and record on

another disc, the timecode will no longer be

consecutive when you use the original disc again

for recording. In this case, to make the timecode

consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK

switch to REGEN.

Saving the real Time in the Timecode

Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to

CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.

When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the

TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.

RESET/RETURN

button

DISP SEL HOLD

RESET

DISPLAY

BRIGHT

LEVE

EXPAND CHAPTER

THUMBNAIL

COUNTER RC U-BIT

CLIP MENU

For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the

Internal Clock” on page 43.

3,5

F-RUN

SET

R-RUN

ESSENCE

MARK

SET

AUTO

MANUAL

AUDIO SELE

S.SEL

CH-1

SUB CLIP

PRESET

AUDIO IN

Setting the user bits

FRONT

REAR

WIRELESS

REGEN

CLOCK

SHIFT

By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal

digits), you can record user information such as

the date, time, or scene number on the timecode

track.

Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK

switch to PRESET.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

SET.

Setting the Time Data

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the

internal generator of this camcorder.

Connections for timecode

synchronization

Connect both the reference video signal and the

external timecode as illustrated below.

Example 1: Synchronizing with an external

timecode

RESET/RETURN button

DISP SEL HOLD

RESET

DISPLAY

BRIGHT

LEVE

EXPAND CHAPTER

THUMBNAIL

COUNTER RC U-BIT

CLIP MENU

2,4

F-RUN

SET

R-RUN

ESSENCE

MARK

SET

AUTO

MANUAL

AUDIO SELE

S.SEL

CH-1

SUB CLIP

PRESET

AUDIO IN

FRONT

REAR

WIRELESS

REGEN

CLOCK

External timecode

SHIFT

Reference video signal

1GENLOCK IN ^a)

2TC IN

Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.

a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

SET.

The first (leftmost) digit flashes.

Use the up and down arrow buttons to

change values, and use the left and right

arrow buttons to move the flashing

digit. Repeat until all digits are set.

To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00

Press the RESET/RETURN button.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the

desired operating mode for the

timecode generator.

The set user bit data will be recorded for both

LTC and VITC.

To store the user bit setting in memory

The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is

automatically retained in memory even when the

power is turned off.

Synchronizing the timecode

You can synchronize the internal timecode

generator of this camcorder with an external

generator for the regeneration of an external

timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode

Setting the Time Data

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 2: Interconnecting a number of

camcorders or timecode synchronization

To lock the timecode to an external

source

Reference camcorder

DISP SEL HOLD

RESET

DISPLAY

BRIGHT

LEVEL

EXPAND CHAPTER

THUMBNAIL

COUNTER RC U-BIT

CLIP MENU

F-RUN

SET

R-RUN

ESSENCE

MARK

SET

AUTO

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

S.SEL

CH-1

CH-2

SUB CLIP

PRESET

AUDIO IN

FRONT

REAR

WIRELESS

REGEN

CLOCK

SHIFT

To another camcorder to be synchronized

1 TEST OUT

2 TC OUT

3 TC IN

4 GENLOCK IN ^a)

SDI IN

GENLOCK

(OPTION)

TC IN

a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.

TEST

OUT

Turn on the POWER switch.

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK

switch to PRESET.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

F-RUN.

Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.

Supply a timecode signal and a

reference video signal complying with

the SMPTE standard and in proper

phase relationship, to the TC IN

connector and to the GENLOCK IN

connector, respectively.

Setting the Time Data

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This operation synchronizes the internal

timecode generator with the external

timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can

disconnect the external timecode without

losing the synchronization. However, there

will be noise on the recorded image if you

connect or disconnect the timecode signal

during recording.

Notes

• When you finish the above procedure, the internal

timecode is immediately synchronized with the

external timecode and the counter display will show

the value of the external timecode. However, wait for

a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before

recording.

• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the

same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the

camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case,

the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized

with the external timecode.

• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to OFF on

the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu,

the timecode cannot be synchronized with the

reference video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK

item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

User bit settings during timecode

synchronization

When the timecode is synchronized, only the time

data is synchronized with the external timecode

value. Therefore, each camcorder can have its

own user bit settings.

You can lock the users bits of this camcorder to

the user bits of external timecode by setting EXT-

LK UBIT in the TIMECODE page of the

MAINTENANCE menu to EXT.

To release the timecode synchronization

First disconnect the external timecode, then set

the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.

To change the power supply from the battery

pack to an external power supply during

timecode synchronization

To maintain a continuous power supply, connect

the external power supply to the DC IN connector

before removing the battery pack. You may lose

timecode synchronization if you remove the

battery pack first.

Camera synchronization during timecode

synchronization

During timecode synchronization, the camera is

genlocked to the reference video signal input

from the GENLOCK IN connector.

Setting the Time Data

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter4 Shooting

• Do not disassemble the cartridge.

• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended

for indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct

position.

Handling Discs

Storage

• Do not store discs where they may be subjected

to direct sunlight, or in other places where the

temperature or humidity is high.

• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able

to gain ingress.

Discs used for recording and

playback

• Store cartridges in their cases.

The following Professional Discs can be used

Care of the discs

for recording and playback on this unit:

• PFD23A (capacity 23.3 GB)

• PFD50DLA (capacity 50.0 GB)

• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a

cartridge using a soft dry cloth.

• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry

before use.

1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Notes

• It is not possible to use the following discs for

recording or playback on this unit:

- Blu-ray Disc

Write-protecting discs

To protect the content recorded on the disc from

accidental erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on

the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the

arrow, as shown in the following figure.

- Professional Disc for Data

• PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM

devices with the DL mark (see the following

illustration). They cannot be used by XDCAM devices

without this mark.

Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab

DL mark

Notes on handling

Handling

The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge,

and is designed to allow handling free of risk

from dust or fingerprints. However, if the

cartridge is subjected to a severe shock, for

example by dropping it, this can result in damage

or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched,

it may be impossible to record video/audio, or to

play back the content recorded on the disc. The

discs should be handled and stored carefully.

• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within

the cartridge.

Slide in the direction of the arrow

Write Inhibit tab settings

SAVE

Recording enabled

Recording disabled

• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause

damage.

Handling Discs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can also write protect-individual clips. For

details, see “Locking (write-protecting) clips” on

page 126.

Loading and unloading a disc

To load a disc

Turn on the POWER switch.

V indication on the outside

The disc is loaded.

Note

To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the

camcorder is in the upright position (the grip

upside, the bottom downside).

To unload a disc

LCD monitor

POWER switch

With the power supply on, press the EJECT

button to open the disc compartment lid and eject

the disc, then remove the disc. If you are not

going to insert another disc, close the disc

compartment lid.

Note

If there is condensation inside the VDR section, the

message “HUMID” appears in the status display on

the color LCD . If this happens, wait until the

indicator goes off before going on to step 2.

To unload a disc when the power supply is off

If the battery is exhausted, it is not possible to

remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button. In

such cases, use the following emergency

procedure to remove the disc manually.

Press the EJECT button.

This opens the lid of the disc compartment.

Turn off the POWER switch.

EJECT button

Carry out the operation shown in the

following figure.

1 Open this rubber cover.

2 Using a screwdriver or similar

implement, slide the black metal plate

visible inside, in the direction of the

rear of the camcorder.

The disc compartment lid opens. A red

Phillips screw is visible inside the

rubber cap.

1 Insert the disc in the V direction, and

2 close the disc compartment lid

manually.

3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the

screw counterclockwise (the direction

shown on the rubber cap).

This ejects the disc.

4 Close the rubber cover firmly.

Handling Discs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Handling of discs when recording

does not end normally (salvage

function)

Recording processing does not end normally if,

for example, the battery pack is removed during

recording, or if the power cord is disconnected

during recording. Because the file system is not

updated, video and audio data recorded in real

time is not recognized as files and clip contents

recorded up to that point are lost.

However, this unit has a salvage function which

can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing

clips on such discs.

Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when

the POWER switch is set to OFF and when

battery exhaustion is detected, because the unit

does not become powered off until after the end

of recording processing.

Notes

• Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until

recording processing has finished and the ACCESS

indicator has gone out.

• This function salvages as much recorded material as

possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%

restoration cannot be guaranteed.

You need not return the screw to its original

position after taking out the disc. Turning on the

power makes the disc compartment mechanism

operable again.

• Even when this function is used, it is not possible to

recover data from immediately before the interruption

of recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.

- Quick salvage: From 2 to 5 seconds of data before

the interruption of recording.

Note

Do not touch the disc or try to forcibly remove it until it

has been completely ejected.

- Full salvage: From 3 to 6 seconds of data before the

interruption of recording.

Formatting a disc

(More data may be lost when the unit is subject to

vibrations, when you switch frequently between

recording and paused, and when you use functions

such as Picture Cash.)

When using a new disc

An unused disc requires no formatting operation.

The disc is automatically formatted so that it is

ready to use when loaded into this unit.

Quick salvage

When the unit is powered on again after a

recording interruption due to a power

interruption, with the disc still loaded in the unit,

clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data

stored in nonvolatile memory and markers

recorded on the disc. Processing time is about 5

seconds.

To format a disc on which material is

recorded

See page 138 for details of formatting a disc.

Note

When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the

disc is erased. (Even locked clips (see page 126) are also

erased.)

Full salvage

When recording on an XDCAM device is

interrupted because of a power interruption, and a

disc is manually ejected from that device with the

Handling Discs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

power off, clips are reconstructed on the basis of

markers recorded on the disc when the disc is

loaded in this unit. Therefore, processing takes

longer than for a quick salvage (about 30 seconds,

although it depends on the state of the disc).

Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage.

appear when you insert a disc that was not

recorded normally. The “XXXX” in the

message is a code for XDCAM devices that can

salvage the disc. Refer to the table below and

use one of the indicated devices to salvage the

disc.

SALVAGE

Insert the disc on which recording did

not end normally.

DISC CANNOT BE

RECORDED.

The following salvage message appears.

FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT

SERVICE TO RUN CLIP

SALVAGE PROGRAM.

(XXXX)

SALVAGE

TO RECORD ON THE

DISC, IT IS NECESSARY

TO EXECUTE SALVAGE.

PUSH ESCAPE SWITCH

OR ROTARY ENCODER.

SALVAGE OK?

YES NO

Code (XXXX) Model name

0002

PDW-1500/530/510/R1

PDW-F70/F350/F330

PDW-F70/F350/F330 (Version

1.9 or higher)

0200

Turn the MENU knob to move b to

“YES”, and press the MENU knob.

Salvage processing starts, and the message

“EXECUTING” appears.

PDW-F75/F355/F335

PDW-HD1500/HR1/700

0300

0301

PDW-HD1500/700 (Version 1.5

or higher)

PDW-F1600/F800

A results message appears when the

processing finishes.

• If the salvage succeeded, the message

“COMPLETED” appears.

• If the salvage failed, the message

“INCOMPLETED” appears. Clips for

which recording did not end normally are

lost.

a) Does not appear on this unit.

To cancel the message and return to normal

operation, exchange the disc for a usable disc

and flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch

to the ESCAPE side, or press the MENU knob.

To exit without salvaging

Select NO in step 1 to exit without performing

salvage processing.

However, the status of the disc does not change.

Salvage is still required to recover the clips for

which recording did not end normally. The

salvage message will appear again when that disc

is inserted again, or when the camcorder is

powered on again.

Notes

• If salvage processing is not done, sections

which were recorded normally can be played

back, but no new recording can be done on the

disc.

• Full salvage of discs recorded by this camcorder

can be performed with the PDW-F1600, PDW-

HD1500, PDW-F800, or PDW-700. Full

salvage cannot be performed with any other

XDCAM device. The following message may

Handling Discs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Check that there are no obstructions

such as cables near the disc

compartment lid. Then press the

EJECT button to open the disc

compartment lid.

Basic Procedure for

Shooting

After checking that the disc is not write-

protected (see page 78), load it and close

the disc compartment lid.

This section describes the basic procedures for

shooting and recording.

Before a shooting session, ensure that the

camcorder is functioning properly.

Basic procedure for shooting: from

adjusting the black balance and white

balance to stopping recording

For details, see “Testing the Camcorder before

Shooting” on page 241.

Switch settings

Basic procedure for shooting: from power

supply to disc loading

After turning on the power and loading a disc, set

the switches and selectors as shown below and

begin operation.

4 5

2 1

1 DISPLAY: ON

2 Iris: Automatic

3 Zoom: Automatic

4 OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC: ON

5 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN: F-RUN or R-RUN

Attach a fully charged battery pack.

For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply” on

page 37.

(set as needed)

6 AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2: AUTO

Set the POWER switch to ON.

Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to

switch the LCD monitor to status

display, and check that the following

conditions are met.

• The HUMID indicator is not showing.

If it is, wait until it disappears.

• The battery status indicator shows at least

five segments (x).

If it does not, replace the battery pack with

a fully charged one.

Basic Procedure for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN

switches, see page 209.

Shooting

During recording, the REC indicator lights in

the viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus

control, if necessary.

Note

During recording (while the ACCESS indicator is

lit) do not remove the battery pack. If you do, the

internal processing for recording may not finish

properly, which may cause the last few seconds of

recording to be lost.

For details, see “Handling of discs when

function)” on page 80.

To stop recording, press the REC

START button or the VTR button on

the lens again.

The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes

off.

5,6 4 1 2

Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to

BLK to adjust the black balance.

The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is

saved as a single clip.

For details of black balance adjustment, see

page 59.

To check the last two seconds of the

recording (recording review)

Select the CC filter and ND filter to

match the lighting conditions, and

adjust the white balance.

If you press the RET button on the lens while

recording is paused, the last two seconds of

the recording is played back. If you hold

down the RET button, a low-speed reverse

search begins at a position two seconds

before the recording end position. When you

release the RET button, the reverse search

stops and playback in the forward direction

begins. After playback, the camcorder is

ready to start recording again.

By assigning the same function as that of the

RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/3/4

switch, COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-700),

or ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800), you can

use the switch in the same way as the lens

RET button.

For details, see “Adjusting the white balance”

on page 60.

Aim the camera at the subject and

adjust the focus and zoom.

On the PDW-F800, you can adjust the focus

by using the Focus Assist function (see page

86).

If necessary, set the electronic shutter

for an appropriate mode and speed.

For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”

on page 65.

On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN

switches, see page 209.

To start recording, press the REC

START button or the VTR button on

the lens.

If the recording start/stop function is

assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4

switches, COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-

700), ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800), and

RET button on the lens, you can also use this

switch.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for

shooting.

Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6, successive

clips are recorded on the disc.

Basic Procedure for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at

the instant when you want to freeze the

picture.

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

The playback pauses and a frozen picture

appears.

REC

START

REC REC

STOP START

REC REC

STOP START

REC

STOP

The timecode of the frozen frame is

displayed in the counter display and the

PLAY/PAUSE indicator now flashes (one

flash/second).

Notes

• It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds.

If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting, this

results in a 2-second clip.

If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of

the original start, this creates a single continuous clip

from the original start time.

To restart playback

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button once again.

To display camera video in the

viewfinder during playback (Live & Play

function)

• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on

a single disc is 300. If an attempt is made to record

more than 300 clips, the error message “MAX # Clips”

appears, even if there is free capacity on the disc.

During playback, the viewfinder normally

displays the playback video. But you can enable

this function to view live camera video instead.

This is a convenient way to frame the next shot

and adjust the focus and exposure while viewing

recorded video on the LCD monitor or an external

monitor.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move the b mark to the

desired item.)

Playback control buttons

During recording, the playback control buttons

(EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/

PAUSE, STOP) have no effect.

Playing back the recorded clip

Normal playback

By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can

review any length of recording on the viewfinder

screen in black and white or in color on the LCD

monitor. There are two other ways to review the

recording.

Display the OUTPUT 2 page of the

OPERATION menu.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Recording review: You can view the last two

seconds of the recording on the viewfinder

screen in black and white or in color on the

LCD monitor.

Select LIVE & PLAY, and then turn the

MENU knob to display “ON”.

The camera video appears in the viewfinder,

even during playback.

Viewing color playback on a video monitor:

You can view the recording in color on a

color video monitor without the need for any

external adaptor.

You can still check the playback video on the

LCD monitor. Playback signals are output

from the video output connectors.

You can also view palyback video during a fast

forward or reverse search.

Clip playback modes

You can set the clip playback mode to either of

the following.

Continuous playback mode: The playback

target is all of the clips on the disc (factory

default setting)

For details about the switches and controls used to

select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio

level, see page 19 and page 27.

To freeze a picture during playback

The following operation can also be done from

the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit.

Single clip playback mode: The playback target

is the currently selected clip only

To select single clip playback mode

Set SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG

1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ON”.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start

playback.

Basic Procedure for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playback in single clip playback mode

Playback stops when it reaches the start or end of

the clip. The next and preceding clips are not

played, even if they exist on the disc. The

available playback types include normal

playback, and high-speed playback in the forward

or reverse directions.

avoids them. However, scratches and soiling

which occur after recording can lead to

deteriorating playback conditions.

• Aging of disc recording layers

Over several decades, the recording layers of

optical discs can age and cause deteriorating

playback conditions.

To move to another clip, press the PREV, NEXT,

F REV + PREV, or F FWD + NEXT button, or

perform a thumbnail search.

• Deteriorating laser diodes performance

The performance of the laser diodes used in

optical heads can worsen with age, leading to

deteriorating playback conditions.

Disc playback start position

Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an

approximate guide to when it is time to replace

optical heads.

Although this unit uses optical discs, it is

designed to offer the most convenient features of

tape playback by VTRs. One of these is the

playback start position, which works in the same

way as with tape, as described below.

To prevent playback conditions from

deteriorating

Pay attention to the following points when

handling discs.

• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs

directly with your hands.

After playback stop

The unit stops at the position where the STOP

button was pressed.

• Do not store for long periods in locations which

are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.

• Do not store for long periods under high

temperatures or in locations exposed to direct

sunlight.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume

playback at the stop position.

After recording

The unit stops at the position where recording

ended.

To play back a clip, press the PREV button to

move to the start frame of any clip, or press the

F REV button to move to any position.

If playback conditions have deteriorated

Read errors occur when playback conditions

continue to deteriorate.

When a read error occurs, the message “DISC

ERROR!” appears, the video freezes, and the

audio output is suppressed.

If this happens, check the following points.

Whether the disc displays the same playback

condition on other XDCAM devices: If so,

the surface of the disc may be dirty or

scratched, or the performance of the

recording layers on the disc may have

worsened due to age. Do not use discs with

these symptoms.

After disc insertion

The unit stops at the position of the disc when it

was most recently ejected.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume

playback at the most recent position.

The playback position is saved to the disc when

the disc is ejected, which allows playback to start

at that position whenever it is loaded into any

XDCAM player.

Note

Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM

device displays the same playback

conditions: If so, the performance of the

laser diodes may have deteriorated. Check

the total optical output time.

The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the

disc is write-protected.

Deteriorating playback conditions

Deteriorating playback may be due to the

following causes.

Deleting the recorded clip

• Scratches and dust on the disc surface

This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar

from cigarette smoke, and so on.

For details, see “Deleting clips” on page 127.

Scratches and soiling which occur before

recording are not a problem because they are

registered in advance as defects, and recording

Basic Procedure for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[F800]

How to read the focus assist indicator

Using the Focus Assist function

The “in focus” position is the position where the

bar reaches its maximum length. Focus on a

subject by rotating the focus ring so that the bar

extends to its maximum length.

Displaying the focus assist indicator in the

viewfinder makes it easier to focus. This is

convenient in situations where it may be difficult

to focus using only the video in the viewfinder.

In focus position: Position

where bar is at maximum

length

To display the focus assist indicator

Display the FOCUS ASSIST page in the

OPERATION menu.

Note

The focus indicator may show little or no variation when

you are shooting a smooth subject or a dark scene.

See “Basic menu operations” (page 193) for

more information about menu operations.

Select FOCUS ASSIST IND, and turn

the MENU knob until ON appears.

The focus assist indicator appears.

Set the following items as required.

FOCUS INS POS: Select the focus assist

indicator display position from BOTTM

(bottom), LEFT, TOP, and RIGHT.

FOCUS AREA MARK: Turn the display of

the frame around the focus detection

range OFF (hide) or ON (display).

Focus detection range frame

Focus assist indicator

Notes

• The focus indicator is not displayed when the gain is

set to 18 dB or higher.

• When you display the focus assist indicator, the

display of effective pixels (which you select by setting

100% MARKER in the MARKER 1 page of the

OPERATION menu to “ON”) is hidden.

• When you display the frame of the focus detection

range, the box cursor (which you select by setting User

Box in the MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION

menu to “ON”) is hidden.

Basic Procedure for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“ShotMark1” or “ShotMark2” appears in the

viewfinder screen for about one second near the

timecode display.

If the SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2

recording function has been assigned to one of the

ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches, COLOR TEMP. button

(PDW-700), and ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800),

you can also use that switch to record a SHOT

MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 essence mark.

Advanced Operations for

Shooting

Recording essence marks

On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches,

see page 209.

Shot marks and other essence marks can be

recorded on the disc.

Recording essence marks for scenes containing

important images and sounds enables quick

access to the marked points. This increases

editing efficiency.

If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the

USB connector, you can record shot marks from

Shot Mark0 up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to

9 keys on the numeric keypad.

To record a shot mark using the RET

button on the lens

Setting clip flags with switches

To make it possible to record shot marks using the

RET button on the lens, carry out the following

procedure.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

You can set three types of clip flags (OK/NG/

KEEP) during recording, immediately after

recording, or during playback. Setting these flags

in each clip that you record makes it easy for

editors and other colleagues to find and select the

clips they need.

You can use switches on the unit to set these

flags. But before you can do so, you need to

assign the corresponding flag functions to the

ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches, the COLOR TEMP

button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-

F800), or the RET button on the lens (see page

209).

Display the ESSENCE MARK page of

the MAINTENANCE menu.

?M11 ESSENCE MARK

TOP

RET SHOT MARK 1

RET SHOT MARK 2

INDEX PIC POS

FIND MODE

0SEC

R.ST

To set a clip flag

During recording, immediately after recording, or

during playback (including search and still

picture playback), press the button to which the

flag function has been assigned. Press the button

once at the position where you want to set the

flag.

The specified flag is set, and “*** ClpFlg” (***:

OK, NG, or KEEP) appears near the timecode

display in the viewfinder for about three seconds.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select the essence mark to be recorded,

and press the MENU knob to display

“ON”.

Repeat the step 2, as necessary.

To clear a clip flag

To record shot mark 1/2

During recording or playback, press the button to

which the flag function has been assigned. Press

the button twice in rapid succession.

The flag is cleared, and “ClpFlg DEL.” appears

for about three seconds.

When the camcorder is in recording or playback

mode, operate the lens RET button as follows.

Shot mark 1: Press the RET button once.

Shot mark 2: Press the RET button twice in rapid

succession.

You can also set and clear clip flags from a GUI

screen. For details, see “Setting clip flags”

(page 125).

Advanced Operations for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

data storage time (Picture Cache time) using the

USER menu.

Setting the thumbnail image at

recording time

The Picture Cache time determines the number of

seconds recorded from the Picture Cache,

counting back from the time when you press the

REC START button or the VTR button on the

lens to start recording. However, the number of

seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache

may be shorter immediately after the setting of

the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is changed, and in

the special situations explained in the following

notes.

When you record a clip, you can specify which

frame to use as the clip thumbnail image (see

page 107).

(The factory default setting is to use the first

frame in the clip as the thumbnail.)

For example, if all clips have the same image in

their first frames, you can specify a frame a few

seconds after the start of the clip, so that all

thumbnails will not show the same image.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Notes

• Storage of images to memory begins after you select

Picture Cache mode. If you begin recording

immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode,

images from before the selection will not be recorded.

• During playback, recording review or GUI screen

operations, no data is saved to the Picture Cache

memory. Thus it is not possible to use this function to

rerecord the last few seconds of material from

playback or recording review.

Display the ESSENCE MARK page of

the MAINTENANCE menu, and press

the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select INDEX PIC POS, and press the

MENU knob.

To set the Picture Cache mode/Picture Cache

time

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

Turn the MENU knob to select the

desired time.

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the REC FUNCTION page of

the OPERATION menu.

Press the MENU knob.

005 REC FUNCTION

CACHE/INTVAL REC:

TOP

OFF

Starting a shoot with a few

seconds of pre-stored picture data

(Picture Cache function)

DISC EXCHG CACHE:

CLIP CONT REC

OFF

The camcorder has a large capacity internal

memory, in which you can cache the last few

seconds (maximum 30 seconds) of captured

video and audio, so that recording starts from a

point just before you press the REC START

button or the VTR button on the lens.

(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Note

Select CACHE REC, and turn the

MENU knob to display CACHE.

Picture Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is

in the following states.

• The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.

• During Slow & Quick Motion shooting (PDW-F800

only)

Select CACHE REC TIME, and turn

the MENU knob to display the desired

Picture Cache time.

As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture

Cache time changes as follows: 0-2s y 2-4s

y 4-6s y 6-8s y 8-10s y 18-20s y

28-30s.

Setting the Picture Cache mode/Picture

Cache time

To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to

turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture

Advanced Operations for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• In Picture Cache mode, you cannot set the F-

RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET to make

timecode settings. To make timecode settings,

first exit Picture Cache mode.

The Picture Cache mode settings once made

continue to be effective until changed.

You can assign the Picture Cache on/off function

to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, COLOR

TEMP. button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5 switch

(PDW-F800), and RET button on the lens.

When power is lost during recording in Picture

Cache mode

• If the POWER switch is turned off during

For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN

recording in Picture Cache mode, the

camcorder gets powered off after disc access

has continued for a few seconds so that the

picture at the moment when the POWER switch

is turned off is recorded.

• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable,

or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording

in Picture Cache mode, video and audio stored

in memory will be lost without being recorded

to the disc. For this reason, make sure you do

not replace the battery while recording.

Notes

• You can do a menu operation to change the Picture

Cache time while the camcorder is in recording mode.

However, the new setting takes effect only after the

recording is finished.

• In Picture Cache mode, the internal timecode generator

operating mode is always F-RUN regardless of the

setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch.

Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode

The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode

is basically the same as that for normal recording.

However, note the following differences.

• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the

picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc

after the picture data stored in memory (equal to

the Picture Cache time) is recorded to disc. For

this reason, disc access may continue for a short

time after you press the REC START button to

stop recording. During this time, the playback

control buttons are disabled, as in recording

mode. Also, if you press the REC START

button or the VTR button on the lens to restart

recording during this time, a separate clip is

recorded.

Time-lapse video (Interval Rec

function)

Using the memory in the camcorder, you can

capture time-lapse video. There are two modes

for this function, which is known as “Interval

Rec”.

Auto Interval Rec mode: In Auto Interval Rec

mode, pictures are automatically shot a frame

(two frames when the recording format is set

to 720p) at a time at the specified interval and

stored in memory. To use this function, you

must set the total time for shooting (TAKE

TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for

recording on the disc (REC TIME).

• When you press the REC START button or the

VTR button on the lens to restart recording

during disc access, the start point of the

Manual Interval Rec mode: A specified number

of frames (NUMBER OF FRAME) is

recorded when you press the REC START

button or the lens VTR button.

recorded clip may be later than the Picture

Cache time, especially when there are a large

number of clips recorded on the disc. In Picture

Cache mode, you should avoid stop and start

recording operations in quick succession.

• The time disc access stops after the REC

START button is pressed equals the Picture

Cache time. However, if you start recording

within the Picture Cache time immediately after

selecting Picture Cache mode, changing the

Picture Cache time or performing playback or

recording review, the picture data for the

duration of the Picture Cache time will not be

stored in memory. Thus, the time disc access

stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes

shorter than the Picture Cache time.

There are two Manual Interval Rec modes: a

single shot mode in which recording is done

once with each press of the button, and a

consecutive mode in which recording is done

repeatedly at a specified interval after the

button is pressed.

A pre-lighting function is available in Auto

Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of

Manual Interval Rec mode. This function

automatically turns on the light before recording

starts, which allows you to record pictures under

stable light and color temperature conditions.

Advanced Operations for Shooting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Item

Description

Note

• When you set the POWER

switch to OFF, the camcorder

will switch off by itself after

disc access has continued for a

few seconds to record the

picture data stored in memory.

• If you remove the battery,

unplug the DC cable, or cut

power to the AC adaptor, picture

data stored before recording

stops (a maximum of ten

When the

camcorder power

is switched off

Interval Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in

the following states.

• The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled.

• The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.

• During Slow & Quick Motion shooting (PDW-F800

only)

• SCAN MODE on the FORMAT page of the

OPERATION menu is set to “23.9P”.

Operation limitations during recording

Item

Description

seconds) may be lost. Take care

when replacing the battery.

Cannot be used.

(i.LINK)

S400 connector

Time code

Auto Interval Rec mode settings and

shooting

The internal time code

generator runs in R-RUN mode

regardless of how the F-RUN/

SET/R-RUN switch is set.

Not recorded.

To make settings

Audio signals

Playback control

buttons

Display the REC FUNCTION page of

the OPERATION menu.

• Auto Interval Rec mode and

the consecutive mode of

Manual Interval Rec mode

The EJECT, F REV, F FWD,

NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE

and STOP buttons are disabled.

To use these buttons, stop

recording by pressing the REC

START button or the VTR

button on the lens.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Slow & Quick Motion” on page

Select CACHE/INTVAL REC, and

turn the MENU knob to display

“A.INT”.

005 REC FUNCTION

TOP

• The single shot mode of

Manual Interval Rec mode

The F REV, F FWD, NEXT,

PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, and

STOP buttons are disabled. To

use these buttons, exit the

Interval Rec mode by pressing

the EJECT button.

CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT

TAKE TOTAL TIME :

REC TIME

PRE-LIGHTING

5MIN

5SEC

OFF

DISC EXCHG CACHE:

CLIP CONT REC

OFF

Menu operations The settings of the Interval Rec-

Directory

a) If an XDCAM device is selected as the Device

Type, then the User Name and Password are set

automatically to the default, and you do not need

to make the Port and Path settings. Simply

selecting the Host Name (or as appropriate the

Description) is enough to fulfill the requirements

for connection.

The status indicated beside each item lights

in yellow during processing for that item, and

lights in green when the processing finishes.

If an error occurs

The status indicator changes to red.

Correct the condition that caused the error

and repeat the operation.

If the User Name or Password of the device

that you want to connect to changes, set them

here.

If you cannot connect

Check the following points.

Set the various items.

• Make sure that this unit and the remote host

are correctly connected to the network.

• If the remote host is an XDCAM device,

make sure that it is not displaying a GUI

screen.

To select an item

Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor,

and then push the SET/S.SEL button or the

MENU knob.

A software keyboard appears so that you can

enter a setting.

• If the remote host is an XDCAM device,

make sure that a disc is inserted.

Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

144

When the connection is complete (the

indicators of all items have turned green), the

Upload Clips via Direct FTP screen appears.

Note

When several files are to be transferred, the entire

transfer task is cancelled when the first transfer

failure occurs. Subsequent clips are not transferred.

To check the connection on the remote

host side

When the transfer of all files has finished, the

Uploading Result Report screen appears.

Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL

button or the MENU knob. This returns you

to the clip thumbnail screen.

If the remote host is an XDCAM device,

check that the “NETWORK!” has appeared

in the display or other status display location.

The progress bars show the progress of the

transfer. If multiple clips are being

transferred, a count of the clips that have

been successfully transferred appears.

If the remote host is an XDCAM device, the

disc usage also appears. (It does not appear if

the remote host is a computer).

To upload part of a clip

You can select part of a clip in the expand

thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen

and upload that part.

Expand thumbnail screen: The clip is divided

arbitrarily into parts of equal length,

regardless of content. Use this method if you

do not need to specify the transfer range

precisely.

Chapter thumbnail screen: Use this method if

you want to transfer a specific range. (By

setting essence marks at the start point and

end point of the transfer range, you can

specify the range with a precision of one

frame.)

If a file of the same name already exists at

the transfer destination

The file name is changed so that it does not

conflict with the file at the destination.

The name of the file on the transfer source

(this unit) appears in the “Original” field, and

the name of the file on the transfer

destination appears in the “Copy” field.

1) If the clip name is a standard name, it is changed

to the unused clip name with the smallest

number. (Example: If names C0001 to C0020

are in use, the name C0021.)

If the clip name is a user-defined name, a serial

number is appended to the clip name. (Example:

If the name is EveningNews, EveningNews(1).)

In the clip thumbnail screen, select a

clip and press the EXPAND or

CHAPTER button.

To cancel the processing

The expand thumbnail screen or the chapter

Do one of the following.

thumbnail screen appears.

• Select “Abort: Immediately”, and then

press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU

knob.

• If you are transferring multiple clips, select

“Abort: After this clip”, and then press the

SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.

(The transfer of subsequent clips will be

cancelled after transfer of the current clip

finishes.)

Select the transfer range.

To select multiple thumbnails

While holding the SHIFT key down, turn the

MENU knob, or press the B/IN or b/OUT

button.

The duration of the transfer range appears in

the lower right of the screen.

• Set the ETHERNET/USB item on the

POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION

menu to DSABL.

Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select a clip to download, and then press

the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU

knob.

Note

When the selected range (duration) in the expand

thumbnail screen is less than two seconds, it is

expanded automatically to two seconds.

The download starts.

When the download finishes, the

Downloading Result Report screen appears.

Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL

button or the MENU knob. This returns you

to the clip thumbnail screen.

Execute step 2 to 9 of the previous

section “To upload entire clips”.

Downloading clips

Proceed as follows to download clips from a

remote host (such as other XDCAM device

devices or a material server).

Copying clips directly between

XDCAM devices

See page 116 for information about thumbnail screen

operations.

In the field or another environment where the

devices are not connected to a network, you can

copy (upload) clips between XDCAM devices by

connecting them directly. The example in the

following procedure shows how to copy a clip

from this unit to a PDW-HD1500. Insert discs

into both units and proceed as follows.

Display the Disc Menu.

Select Download Clip via Direct FTP,

and then press the SET/S.SEL button or

the MENU knob.

The Select Remote Host screen of the

Download Clip via Direct FTP command

appears.

Connect this unit and the PDW-

HD1500 by a network cable.

The cable can be either a cross cable or a

straight cable.

This unit

Network cable

(not supplied)

Execute steps 6 to 9 of “To upload entire

clips” (page 142).

If the connection succeeds, the Select Clip to

Download screen appears.

PDW-HD1500

Set up the two units as follows.

Settings on this unit

Item

Setting

ETHERNET/ ENABLE

USB

POWER SAVE

page of

Notes

OPERATION

• If the remote host is a computer, only the MXF

files in the specified directory appear.

• File names containing other than ASCII

characters (kanji and so on) are not displayed.

NETWORK page DHCP

MAINTENANCE

ENABLE

UPnP

Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

146

Settings on the PDW-HD1500

Detailed information about the connection

destination device (the PDW-HD1500)

appears.

Item

Setting

Item M50: DHCP in the

Maintenance menu

Item M59: UPnP in the

Maintenance menu

ENABLE

11 With “Connect” selected, press the

SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.

Transfer of the clip begins as soon as the

connection is established.

ENABLE

Power both units off and on again, and

wait for about three minutes.

During transfer of the clip, “NETWORK!”

appears in the display of the connection

destination device (the PDW-HD1500).

Check that the IP addresses of the two

units have been set as follows by the

Auto-IP function.

When transfer of the clip completes, an

Uploading Result Report appears on the

screen.

IP address of this unit

Item

Setting

Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU

knob to return to the clip thumbnail screen.

NETWORK IP

169.254.XXX.

page of

MAINTEN

ANCE

ADDRESS XXX

12 Check the copied clip in the clip

thumbnail screen of the connection

destination device (the PDW-HD1500).

(X: any number)

IP address of the PDW-HD1500

Item

Setting

Item M51: IP

169.254.XXX.XXX

ADDRESS PRESET in (X: any number)

the Maintenance menu

In the clip list thumbnail screen of this

unit, select the clip to copy (upload).

Display the Thumbnail Menu.

Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP, and

then press the SET/S.SEL button or the

MENU knob.

With , selected, the Select Transfer Type

screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP

command appears.

Press the SET/S.SEL button or the

MENU knob.

The Select Remote Host screen appears.

Select “Hosts Discovered via UPnP”,

and then press the SET/S.SEL button or

the MENU knob.

The detected connection destination device

(the PDW-HD1500) appears in the Select

Host Discovered via UPnP screen.

10 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the

MENU knob.

Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Shortcut List

You can access many functions from the

keyboard, without displaying a menu (shortcut

operations).

Shortcuts are available for the following

functions. The plus sign (+) indicates that one

button is held down while another is pressed, for

example “SHIFT + RESET/RETURN”.

Note

The same shortcut may access different functions,

depending on the screen that is active when it is

executed.

Function

Operation

Clip List Thumbnail (display clip list thumbnail screen)

Expand Thumbnail (display expand thumbnail screen)

Chapter Thumbnail (display chapter thumbnail screen)

Essence Mark Thumbnail (display essence mark thumbnail

screen)

SUB CLIP/DISC MENU

DISP SEL/EXPAND

HOLD/CHAPTER

SHIFT + THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK

Add Sub Clip (add sub clip)

SHIFT + SET/S.SEL

Delete Clip (delete clip)

SHIFT + RESET/RETURN

SHIFT + STOP

Lock/Unlock Clip (lock or unlock clip)

Set Inpoint (set In point)

Left-arrow + SET/S.SEL

Set Outpoint (set Out point)

Right-arrow + SET/S.SEL

Cue up Inpoint (cue up In point)

Cue up Outpoint (cue up Out point)

Reset Inpoint (reset In point)

Left-arrow + PREV or left-arrow + NEXT

Right-arrow + PREV or right-arrow + NEXT

Left-arrow + RESET/RETURN

Right-arrow + RESET/RETURN

Reset Outpoint (reset Out point)

Cue up (cue up)

SET/S.SEL

Cue up & Play (cue up and play)

PLAY/PAUSE

Page Down (switch to next page)

Page Up (switch to previous page)

Go To End (go to the last item)

SHIFT + down-arrow or F FWD

SHIFT + up-arrow or F REV

SHIFT + NEXT

Go To Top (go to the first item)

SHIFT + PREV

Select Multi Clip (select multiple clips)

Exit (exit the current thumbnail screen)

SHIFT + right-arrow or SHIFT + left-arrow

THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK

a) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu

is set to “Cue up & Play”, then play starts as soon as

cueup is ready.

b) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu

is set to “Cue up & Play”, then pressing the SET/

S.SEL button has the same effect.

Shortcut List

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

[B] OPERATION menu

Menu Organization

OPERATION

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

SUPERIMPOSE

LCD

REC FUNCTION

ASSIGNABLE SW

POWER SAVE

VF DISP 1

The following chart shows the organization of

menus in this camcorder.

VF DISP 2

VF DISP 3

' ! ' LED

TOP MENU

' ! ' LED STD ^a)

MARKER 1

USER [A]

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE

ALL

OPERATION [B]

PAINT [C]

MAINTENANCE [D]

FILE [E]

MARKER 2

FOCUS ASSIST ^a)

GAIN SW

VF SETTING

AUTO IRIS

SHOT ID

SHOT DISP

SET STATUS

WHITE SETTING

OFFSET WHT

SHT ENABLE

LENS FILE

FORMAT

SOURCE SEL

UMID SET

DIAGNOSIS [F]

[A] USER menu

USER

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

SUPERIMPOSE

LCD

REC FUNCTION

ASSIGNABLE SW

VF DISP 1

CLIP TITLE

FILE NAMING

SELECT FUNCTION

LENS CONFIG

MEMORY REC

VF DISP 2

' ! ' LED

MARKER 1

GAIN SW

a) PDW-F800 only

VF SETTING

AUTO IRIS

SHOT ID

SHOT DISP

SET STATUS

LENS FILE

USER FILE

Menu Organization

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[C] PAINT menu

[E] FILE menu

FILE

USER FILE

USER FILE 2

ALL FILE

SCENE FILE

REFERENCE

USER GAMMA ^a)

LENS FILE 1

LENS FILE 2

LENS FILE 3

MEMORY STICK

PAINT

SW STATUS

WHITE

BLACK/FLARE

GAMMA

BLACK GAMMA

KNEE ^a)

KNEE 1 ^b)

KNEE 2 ^b)

DETAIL 1

DETAIL 2

SD DETAIL

SKIN DETAIL

MTX LINEAR

MTX MULTI

V MODULATION

SATURATION

NOISE SUPPRESS

SCENE FILE

a) PDW-F800 only

[F] DIAGNOSIS menu

DIAGNOSIS

HOURS METER

TIME/DATE

ROM VERSION 1

ROM VERSION 2

ROM VERSION 3

DEV STATUS

OPTION

a) PDW-700 only

b) PDW-F800 only

[D] MAINTENANCE menu

TOP menu and top-level menus

MAINTENANCE

WHITE SHADING

BLACK SHADING

LEVEL ADJUST

BATTERY 1

BATTERY 2

AUDIO-1

The TOP menu appears when, with no menu

displayed, you hold down the MENU knob and

set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. The TOP

menu contains only top-level menus.

AUDIO-2

AUDIO-3

WRR SETTING

TIMECODE

USER

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE

ALL

ESSENCE MARK

CAM CONFIG 1

CAM CONFIG 2

CAM CONFIG 3

PRESET WHITE

WHITE FILTER ^a)

DCC ADJUST

AUTO IRIS 2

GENLOCK

OPERATION

PAINT

MAINTENANCE

FILE

DIAGNOSIS

When you select a top-level menu, the most

recently shown page of that menu appears. The

CONTENTS page appears when the menu is

selected for the first time.

ND COMP

AUTO SHADING

APR

For details about how to use menus, see page 193.

NETWORK

UP CONVERTER

USER menu

a) PDW-700 only

This menu allows you to add any desired page

from the OPERATION, PAINT,

MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS

menus to suit your needs. By gathering frequently

used pages on the USER menu beforehand, you

can call up them quickly whenever you need

them.

This menu is normally displayed when the

MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON.

Menu Organization

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Once a camcorder is set up according to your

preferences and you save an ALL file in a

“Memory Stick”, you can easily set other

camcorders to those settings by loading the data

from the “Memory Stick”.

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu

This menu allows you to add pages to or delete

pages from the USER menu to suit your needs.

ALL menu

Note

This menu allows you to handle all items in the

OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE,

and DIAGNOSIS menus as if they were in one

menu.

Device specific data (output levels and shading that

requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.

Scene files

In the scene file, the setting values of PAINT

menu items set to shoot a particular scene are

saved. You can save up to five scene files in the

camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a

“Memory Stick”. For example, first adjust the

settings to shoot a rehearsal of a particular scene

and then save them as a scene file. Then load that

file before the actual shooting so that you can

quickly recreate setup conditions of the rehearsal.

OPERATION menu

This menu contains items for changing settings

according to conditions related to the subject

when the camcorder is being operated.

PAINT menu

This menu contains items for making detailed

image adjustments while using a waveform

monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the

camera. Support of a video engineer is usually

required to use this menu. Although you can also

use an external remote control unit to set the items

on this menu, this menu is effective when using

the camcorder by itself outdoors.

Reference files

Reference files save the reference values that are

set when STANDARD is executed in the SCENE

FILE page of the PAINT menu. You can save one

reference file in the internal memory of the unit

and one in a “Memory Stick”.

Lens files

Lens files save the setting data used to

compensate for the characteristics of lenses, such

as flare, white shading, and auto iris gain. You

can save up to 32 lens files in the internal memory

of the unit and up to 100 lens files in a “Memory

Stick”.

MAINTENANCE menu

This menu contains items for making settings for

audio, timecode, essence marks, and battery.

FILE menu

This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the

camcorder memory or in a “Memory Stick”. The

following files can be saved.

DIAGNOSIS menu

This menu shows the digital hours meter, the

ROM version, and information about the internal

device status of the camcorder.

User files

User files save the setting items and setting data

of customized USER menus. You can save up to

100 user files in a “Memory Stick”. Once you

save a user file in a “Memory Stick”, you can

easily set the USER menu to your preference by

loading the file.

For details on user files, see “Saving and Recalling

User Files” on page 217.

ALL files

ALL files save the setting data of all of the menus.

You can save up to 100 ALL files in a “Memory

Stick”.

Menu Organization

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu List

Tips

• No. indicates the PDW-F800 and PDW-700 page number. “—” indicates that the page does not exist.

• The bold-faced numbers designate the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory.

• The following lists include items and settings that appear only when an option board or separately sold

software is installed.

• The bold-faced settings are the factory default settings.

• The initial value of items with a setting range of –99 to 99 is 0.

• When the setup value in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the value is a relative

value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.

OPERATION menu

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

01/01 OUTPUT 1

SDI OUT 1 SELECT

OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI

Selects the output signal from the

SDI OUT 1 connector.

SDI OUT 2 SELECT

SDI OUT 2 SUPER

OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI

Selects the output signal from the

SDI OUT 2 connector.

OFF/ON

Sets the superimposed

information output from the SDI

OUT 2 connector.

TEST OUT SELECT

VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD

Selects the output signal from the

TEST OUT connector.

Note

When R, G, or B is selected, turning

the power of the unit off and on

changes the setting to Y.

TEST OUT SUPER

OFF/ON

Sets the superimposed

information output from the

TEST OUT connector.

Notes

• Regardless of this setting, text

data is output from this connector

when the setting of TEST OUT

SELECT is Y, R, G, or B. During

the display of text data, you can

hide the text data by switching

this item from ON to OFF. (It is

also hidden in the viewfinder.)

• When TEST OUT SELECT is set

to LCD, the mode selected with

the DISP SEL/EXPAND button

determines whether text is

displayed or hidden.

Menu List

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

02/02 OUTPUT 2

LIVE & PLAY

OFF/ON

For details, see “To display

camera video in the viewfinder

during playback (Live & Play

function)” on page 84.

DOWN CON MODE CROP/LETTR/SQEZE Sets the conversion mode for

(Does not appear when (LETTR is displayed

the FORMAT page item when the LETTER BOX

SYSTEM LINE is set to item on the SELECT

1080 and the SYSTEM FUNCTION page is set

FREQUENCY item is to “ENABL”.)

set to 23.9P)

down-converted output.

WIDE ID

THROU/AUTO

Specifies whether to add wide

picture information to the SD

output signal.

THROU: Output the video

signals without adding wide

picture information.

AUTO: When the DOWN CON

MODE item is set to

SQEZE, add wide picture

information to the output

video signals.

Menu List

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

OFF/ON

Description

03/03 SUPER

SUPER(VFDISP)

SUPER(MENU)

SUPER(TC)

When the SDI OUT 2 SUPER

item or the TEST OUT SUPER

item on the OUTPUT 1 page is

set to ON, turn the output of text

(superimposed) information from

the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT

connector on or off for each item.

IMPOSE

SUPER(MARKER)

OFF/ON

[F800]

Turns the marker display on or off

in the output from the following

connectors.

• SDI OUT 2 connector (when SDI

OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT

1 page is set to HDSDI, and SDI

OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON)

• TEST OUT connector (when

TEST OUT SUPER on the

OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON)

[700]

When the TEST OUT SUPER

item on the OUTPUT 1 page is

set to ON, turns the marker

display output from the TEST

OUT connector on or off.

OFF/ON

When SDI OUT 2 SELECT on

the OUTPUT 1 page is set to

HDSDI, and SDI OUT 2 SUPER

is set to ON, turns the output of

the zebra display on and off in the

output from the SDI OUT 2

connector.

[F800]

SUPER(ZEBRA)

Note

This item does not appear when

Slow & Quick Motion is enabled.

04/04 LCD

LCD COLOR

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the LCD color.

LCD

OFF/ON

Turns the marker and zebra

display in the LCD monitor on or

off.

MARKER&ZEBRA

Menu List

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

05/05 REC

FUNCTION

Page

Item

Settings

Description

OFF/ON

For details, see “Shooting with

93.

[F800]

SLOW & QUICK

1080/23.98P: 1 to 48

1080/25P: 1 to 50

[F800]

FRAME RATE

1080/29.97P: 1 to 60

CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF/CACHE/A. INT/ For details, see “Starting a shoot

M. INT

with a few seconds of pre-stored

picture data (Picture Cache

function)” on page 88 and “Time-

lapse video (Interval Rec

CACHE REC TIME

0-2S/2-4S/4-6S/6-8S/8-

10S/18-20S/28-30S

TAKE TOTAL TIME 5MIN/10MIN/15MIN/

20MIN/30MIN/40MIN/

50MIN/1H/2H/3H/4H/

5H/7H/10H/15H/20H/

30H/40H/50H/70H/

function)” on page 89.

100H

REC TIME

5SEC/10SEC/15SEC/

20SEC/30SEC/40SEC/

50SEC/1MIN to 85MIN

PRE-LIGHTING

OFF/2SEC/5SEC/

10SEC

NUMBER OF FRAME When SYSTEM LINE is

set to 720 and REC

FORMAT is set to

HD422 50, HD420

HQ, or HD420 SP:

2/6/12

When either SYSTEM

LINE or REC

FORMAT is set to

another setting: 1/3/

TRIGGER INTERVAL M/1SEC to 10SEC/

15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/

40SEC/50SEC/1MIN to

10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/

30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/

1H/2H/3H/4H/6H/12H/

24H

DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF/ON

For details, see “Exchanging

discs while recording (Disc

Exchange Cache function)” on

page 94.

CLIP CONT REC

OFF/ON

For details, see “Recording with

the Clip Continuous Rec

function” on page 95.

Menu List

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

06/06 ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW <1>

For details, see “Assigning

functions to ASSIGN switches” on

page 209.

ASSIGN SW <2>

ASSIGN SW <3>

ASSIGN SW <4>

[F800]

ASSIGN SW <5>

ASSIGN SW <RET>

[700]

COLOR TEMP SW

ZOOM SPEED

0 to 20 to 99

OFF/ON

DSABL/ENABL

EE/SAVE

OFF/ON

RETURN VIDEO

07/07 POWER SAVE ETHERNET/USB

i.LINK(FAM)

For details, see “Setting power

saving functions” on page 212.

REC AUDIO OUT

TEST OUT SAVE

08/08 VF DISP 1

VF DISP

OFF/ON

For details, see “Selecting the

display items” on page 201.

VF DISP MODE

DISP EXTENDER

DISP FILTER

DISP WHITE

DISP GAIN

1/2/3

OFF/ON

DISP SHUTTER

DISP AUDIO

DISP DISC

OFF/ON

DISP IRIS

OFF/ON

09/09 VF DISP 2

DISP ZOOM

OFF/ON

DISP COLOR TEMP OFF/ON

DISP BATT REMAIN INT/VOLT/AUTO

DISP DC IN

OFF/ON

DISP 16:9/4:3 ID

(When the CBKZ-

MD01 is installed)

OFF/ON

DISP WRR RF LVL

OFF/ON

DISP REC FORMAT OFF/ON

DISP CLIP NO(PB)

DISP TIMECODE

DISP ALAC

OFF/ON

10/10 VF DISP 3

LOW LIGHT

LOW LIGHT LEVEL (–99 to 99)

VF BATT WARNING 10%/20%

ABSOLUTE VALUE OFF/ON

Menu List

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

OFF/ON

Description

11/11 ‘!’ LED

GAIN <!>

SHUTTER <!>

For details, see “Indicators” on

page 32.

[700]

WHITE PRESET <!>

[F800]

OFF/ON

WHITE BAL <!>

[F800]

OFF/ON

CC 5600K <!>

ATW RUN <!>

OFF/ON

EXTENDER <!>

[700]

FILTER <!>

[F800]

OFF/ON

FILTER ND <!>

[F800]

FILTER CC <!>

OVERRIDE <!>

GAIN <!>

12/—

0dB/LOW/MID/HIGH For details, see “Indicators” on

[F800]

‘!’ LED STD

page 32.

SHUTTER <!>

OFF/ESC/ 1/100 / 1/125

/ 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 /

1/2000 /SLS

The setting of SHUTTER <!>

varies depending on the

resolution and system frequency.

See page 33 for information about

the standard settings, and see

page 65 for information about the

settings.

WHITE BAL <!>

CC 5600K <!>

P/A/B/PA/PB/AB

OFF/ON

1/2/3/4

ATW RUN <!>

EXTENDER <!>

FILTER ND <!>

FILTER CC <!>

OVERRIDE <!>

A/B/C/D

OFF/ON

Menu List

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

13/12 MARKER 1

MARKER

OFF/ON

For details, see “Setting the

marker display” on page 203.

CENTER

OFF/ON

CENTER MARK

SAFTY ZONE

SAFTY AREA

ASPECT

1/2/3/4

OFF/ON

80%/90%/92.5%/95%

OFF/ON

ASPECT SELECT

15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/

2.35

ASPECT MASK

OFF/ON

ASPECT MASK LVL 0 to 12 to 15

100% MARKER

USER BOX

OFF/ON

14/13 MARKER 2

OFF/ON

USER BOX WIDTH

3 to 240 to 479

USER BOX HEIGHT 3 to 135 to 269

USER BOX H POS

USER BOX V POS

CENTER H POS

CENTER V POS

–477 to 0 to 476

–267 to 0 to 266

–480 to 0 to 479

–270 to 0 to 269

ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF/ON

ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95%

FOCUS ASSIST IND OFF/ON

15/—

For details, see “Using the Focus

Assist function” on page 86.

[F800]

FOCUS

ASSIST

FOCUS IND POS

BOTTM/LEFT/TOP/

RIGHT

FOCUS AREA MARK OFF/ON

16/14 GAIN SW

GAIN LOW

–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/

6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/

For details, see “Setting gain

values for the GAIN selector

24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB positions” on page 208.

GAIN MID

–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/

6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/

24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB

GAIN HIGH

GAIN TURBO

–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/

6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/

24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB

–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/

6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/

24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB

TURBO SW IND

OFF/ON

SHOCKLESS GAIN

OFF/ON

Menu List

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

17/15 VF SETTING ZEBRA

ZEBRA SELECT

Page

Item

Settings

Description

OFF/ON

For details, see “Setting the

viewfinder” on page 204.

1/2/BOTH

ZEBRA1 DET LVL

ZEBRA1 APT LVL

ZEBRA2 DET LVL

VF DETAIL LEVEL

20% to 70% to 107%

1% to 10% to 20%

52% to 100% to 109%

(–99 to 99)

VF ASPECT (SD)

(When the REC

AUTO/16:9

FORMAT item is set to

IMX50, IMX40,

IMX30, or DVCAM)

18/16 AUTO IRIS

IRIS OVERRIDE

IRIS SPEED

OFF/ON

For details, see “Changing the

Reference Value for Automatic

Iris Adjustment” on page 69.

(–99 to 99)

CLIP HIGH LIGHT

IRIS WINDOW

IRIS WINDOW IND

IRIS VAR WIDTH

IRIS VAR HEIGHT

IRIS VAR H POS

IRIS VAR V POS

ID-1

OFF/ON

1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR

OFF/ON

20 to 240 to 479

20 to 135 to 269

–460 to 0 to 459

–250 to 0 to 249

19/17 SHOT ID

Blank/up to 12

characters

For details, see “Setting the shot

ID” on page 205.

ID-2

ID-3

ID-4

Blank/up to 12

characters

Blank/up to 12

characters

Blank/up to 12

characters

20/18 SHOT DISP

SHOT DATE

SHOT TIME

OFF/ON

For details, see “Recording shot

data superimposed on the color

bars” on page 205.

OFF/ON

SHOT MODEL NAME OFF/ON

SHOT SERIAL NO

SHOT ID SEL

OFF/ON

OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/

ID-4

SHOT 16:9 CHARA

OFF/ON

SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF/ON

21/19 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL OFF/ON

STATUS SYSTEM OFF/ON

STATUS FUNCTION OFF/ON

STATUS AUDIO OFF/ON

For details, see “Displaying the

status confirmation screens” on

page 206.

Menu List

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

22/20 WHITE

SETTING

WHITE SWITCH MEM/ATW

Specifies the operating mode

when the WHITE BAL switch is

set to the B side.

MEM: Auto white balance

ATW: Auto tracing white balance

SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF/1/2/3

Specifies the transition time when

the WHITE BAL switch is

changed to a new setting (1 is

fastest)

ATW HOLD

MEMORY

OFF/ON

Selects whether ATW (auto

tracing white balance) settings are

saved in the memory (A or B)

selected by the WHITE BAL

switch, in addition to the

dedicated ATW memory.

OFF: Not saved

ON: Saved

For details, see “To save white

balance settings obtained by

ATW” on page 64.

ATW SPEED

1/2/3/4/5

OFF/ON

Switches the transition speed of

auto tracing white balance (ATW)

(1 is fastest)

AWB FIXED AREA

FILTER WHT MEM

Executes AWB (auto white

balance) at the center of the

screen.

Specifies whether to allocate a

white balance memory slot for

each position number of the

FILTER selector.

23/21 OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF/ON

For details, see “Specifying an

offset for the auto white balance

setting” on page 212.

WARM-COOL <A>

Displays reference color

temperature

WARM-COOL BAL

<A>

(–99 to 99)

OFFSET WHITE OFF/ON

WARM-COOL

Displays reference color

temperature

WARM-COOL BAL

(–99 to 99)

Menu List

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

OFF/ON

Description

24/22 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS

SHUTTER SLS

The items which can be set differ

depending on the setting of the

SYSTEM FREQUENCY item on

the FORMAT page. For details,

see “Setting the Electronic

Shutter” on page 65.

SHUTTER 1/32

SHUTTER 1/33

SHUTTER 1/40

SHUTTER 1/48

SHUTTER 1/50

When the recording format is

1080/23.98P and 720/59.94P

(SCAN MODE: 23.9P), more

shutter speeds can be selected and

the SHT ENABLE 2 page appears

to display them.

SHUTTER 1/60

SHUTTER 1/96

SHUTTER 1/100

SHUTTER 1/120

SHUTTER 1/125

SHUTTER 1/250

SHUTTER 1/500

SHUTTER 1/1000

SHUTTER 1/2000

25/23 LENS FILE

LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32

For details, see “Selecting the

lens file” on page 213.

F.ID

Display only

L.ID

L.MF

Menu List

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

26/24 FORMAT

SYSTEM LINE

1080/720

The selectable SYSTEM

FREQUENCY settings differ

depending on the setting of

SYSTEM LINE. For details, see

“Setting the Recording Format”

(page 57).

SYSTEM

FREQUENCY

59.9i/29.9P/50i/25P/

23.9P/59.9P/50P

SCAN MODE

59.9P/23.9P

(Only when SYSTEM

LINE is set to 720, and

SYSTEM

FREQUENCY is set to

59.9P.)

REC FORMAT

HD422 50/HD420 HQ/

HD420 SP/IMX50/

IMX40/IMX30/

DVCAM

(IMX50, IMX40,

IMX30, and DVCAM

are displayed when the

CBKZ-MD01 is

installed.)

ASPECT RATIO (SD) 16:9/4:3

(When the REC

FORMAT item is set to

IMX50, IMX40,

The selectable settings differ

depending on the setting of REC

FORMAT. For details, see

“Setting the Recording Format”

(page 57).

IMX30, or DVCAM)

AU DATA LEN (IMX) 16bit/24bit

(When the REC

FORMAT item is set to

IMX50, IMX40, or

IMX30)

COUNTRY

NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC For details, see “Setting the Area

AREA/PAL AREA of Use” on page 42.

Menu List

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

27/25 SOURCE SEL FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO

Input mode selection for front

microphone.

(When stereo

microphone is

connected)

REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM/EXT

(When the CBK-HD01

or CBK-SC02 option

For details, see “Recording video

from external devices” (page

103).

board is installed)

EXT VIDEO SOURCE VBS/SDSDI/HDSDI

(When the CBK-HD01 (VBS is displayed when

or CBK-SC02 option

board is installed)

the CBK-SC02 is

installed. SDSDI and

HDSDI are displayed

when the CBK-HD01 is

installed.)

WIDE MODE(EXT)

(When the CBK-HD01

or CBK-SC02 option

board is installed)

AUTO/16:9

When the input signal is SD,

select the method that determines

whether the signal is treated as a

wide signal.

AUTO: When wide picture

information is detected in the

input signal, treat the signal

as a wide signal and set the

up-converter operating mode

to squeeze mode. Record

wide picture information

when recording SD. When

wide picture information is

not detected, set the up-

converter operating mode to

edge crop mode and do not

record wide picture

information.

16:9: Always treat the signal as a

wide signal and set the up-

converter operating mode to

squeeze mode. Record wide

picture information when

recording SD.

SETUP REMOVE

(When the COUNTRY

item is set to

“NTSC(J)AREA” or

“NTSC AREA” and the

CBK-SC02 option

board is installed)

0.0%/7.5%

Selects whether to modify the

setup level of input video signals.

7.5%: Remove the setup. (Select

when signals with 7.5%

setup are input.)

0.0%: Do not remove the setup.

(Select when signals without

setup are input.)

28/26 UMID SET

COUNTRY CODE

ORGANIZATION

USER CODE

Blank/up to 4 characters For details, see “Setting the

UMID data” on page 213.

Blank/up to 4 characters

TIME ZONE

00 to 3F

Menu List

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

29/27 CLIP TITLE

TITLE

DSABL/ENABL

EXEC

For details, see “Assigning user-

defined clip titles automatically”

on page 96.

SELECT PREFIX

(When the TITLE item

is set to “ENABL”)

CLEAR NUMERIC

(When the TITLE item

is set to “ENABL”)

EXEC

LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC

(When the TITLE item

is set to “ENABL”)

PREFIX

TITLE/up to 10

(When the TITLE item characters

is set to “ENABL”)

NUMERIC

00001 to 99999

(When the TITLE item

is set to “ENABL”)

30/28 FILE NAMING NAMING FORM

C****/FREE

For details, see “Assigning user-

defined names to clips and clip

lists” on page 99.

AUTO NAMING

(When the NAMING

FORM item is set to

“FREE”)

C****/TITLE/PLAN

Menu List

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

31/29 SELECT

FUNCTION

Page

Item

Settings

Description

LETTER BOX

DISABLE/ENABLE

Enable the selection of “LETTR”

(LETTER BOX) in the DOWN

CON MODE item on the

OUTPUT 2 page.

(Does not

appear when the

FORMAT page

item SYSTEM

LINE is set to

1080 and the

SYSTEM

FREQUENCY

item is set to

23.9P)

Note

Breakup may occur in output

signals and in the video and audio

of this unit for about 5 to 10

seconds immediately after this

setting is changed.

FOCUS MAG

DISABLE/ENABLE

Enable the assignment of the

FOCUS MAG function to the

ASSIGN switches.

Note

Breakup may occur in output

signals and in the video and audio

of this unit for about 5 to 10

seconds immediately after this

setting is changed.

HD t SD PHASE

DELAYED

Display only

Appears when LETTER BOX is

set to “ENABLE”, or when

FOCUS MAG is set to

“ENABLE”.

Note

In these states, the phases of HD

output and SD output from this unit

do not match.

REF t HD-Y PHASE Display only

DELAYED

Appears when FOCUS MAG is

set to “ENABLE”.

Note

In this state, the phase of HD-Y

output from this unit does not match

the phase of the GENLOCK IN

signal. When multiple PDW-700

units are daisy chained via this unit

(see page 76), inter-system phases

do not match.

32/–

IMAGE INVERT

OFF/ON

When the recording format is

1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/

29.97P, specifies whether to

cancel the image inversion that

can occur when a cinema lens

converter is mounted.

[F800]

LENS CONFIG

OFF: Do not cancel.

ON: Cancel.

This page does not appear when

the recording format is other than

1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/

29.97P.

Menu List

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

33/30 MEMORY

REC

MEMORY REC

DSABL/ENABL

For details, see “Recording proxy

data” on page 104.

COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC

COPY ALL CLIPS

ABORT COPY

EXEC

DELE ALL MEM CLP EXEC

MEMORY FORMAT EXEC

PAINT menu

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

01/01 SW STATUS

GAMMA

OFF/ON

Turns the gamma correction on

or off.

BLACK GAMMA

MATRIX

Turns the black gamma

correction on or off.

Turns the linear matrix correction

and user-set matrix correction

functions on or off.

KNEE

OFF/ON

Turns the knee correction on or

off.

WHITE CLIP

OFF/ON

Turns the white clipping

correction on or off.

DETAIL

OFF/ON

Turns the detail signal on or off.

APERTURE

OFF/ON

Turns the aperture function on or

off.

FLARE

OFF/ON

Turns the flare function on or off.

Selects the test signal.

TEST SAW

OFF/ON

02/02 WHITE

COLOR TEMP <A>

Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of

temperature.

WHITE A.

C TEMP BAL <A>

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the value more precisely

when the color temperature

adjustment through COLOR

TEMP is not satisfactory.

R GAIN <A>

(–99 to 99)

Only the value of R GAIN is

changed.

B GAIN <A>

Only the value of B GAIN is

changed.

COLOR TEMP

C TEMP BAL

Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of

temperature.

WHITE B.

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the value more precisely

when the color temperature

adjustment through COLOR

TEMP is not satisfactory.

R GAIN

B GAIN

(–99 to 99)

Only the value of R GAIN is

changed.

Only the value of B GAIN is

changed.

Menu List

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

03/03 BLACK/

FLARE

MASTER BLACK

R BLACK

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the master black level.

Adjusts the R black level.

Adjusts the B black level.

B BLACK

MASTER FLARE

Adjusts the flare level of the

master.

R FLARE

G FLARE

B FLARE

FLARE

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

Adjusts the R flare level.

Adjusts the G flare level.

Adjusts the B flare level.

Turns the flare correction circuit

on or off.

TEST OUT SELECT

GAMMA

VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD

OFF/ON

Selects the output signal of TEST

OUT connector.

04/04 GAMMA

Turns the gamma correction

function on or off.

STEP GAMMA

MASTER GAMMA

R GAMMA

0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90

(–99 to 99)

Sets the gamma correction curve

by steps.

Sets the master gamma

correction curve.

(–99 to 99)

Sets the R gamma correction

curve.

G GAMMA

(–99 to 99)

Sets the G gamma correction

curve.

B GAMMA

(–99 to 99)

Sets the B gamma correction

curve.

TEST OUT SELECT

GAMMA TABLE

VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD

STD/HG/USER

Selects the output signal of TEST

OUT connector.

Selects the gamma type.

STD: Standard gamma

HG: Hyper gamma

USER: User gamma (PDW-F800

only)

GAM TABLE (STD)

1 to 5 to 6

Selects the standard gamma type.

1: Corresponds to SD camcorder

2: x 4.5 gain

3: x 3.5 gain

4: Corresponds to SMPTE-240M

5: Corresponds to ITU-R709

6: x 5.0 gain

GAM TABLE (HG)

1 to 4

Selects the hyper gamma type.

1: Compress 325% video input

to100% video output.

2: Compress 460% video input

to100% video output.

3: Compress 325% video input

to109% video output.

4: Compress 460% video input

to109% video output.

1 to 4

Selects the user gamma type.

[F800]

GAM TABLE (USER)

Menu List

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

05/05 BLACK

GAMMA

BLACK GAMMA

OFF/ON

Turns the black gamma

correction on or off.

BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/

Sets the range affected by black

gamma.

HIGH

MASTER BLK

GAMMA

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the master black gamma.

R BLACK GAMMA

G BLACK GAMMA

B BLACK GAMMA

TEST OUT SELECT

KNEE

(–99 to 99)

Sets the correction curve of the R

black gamma.

(–99 to 99)

Sets the correction curve of the G

black gamma.

(–99 to 99)

Sets the correction curve of the B

black gamma.

VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD

OFF/ON

Selects the output signal of TEST

OUT connector.

06/06 [700]

KNEE

[F800]

Turns the knee correction circuit

on or off.

50.0% to 95.0% to

109.0%

Sets the knee point level.

[700]

KNEE POINT

[F800]

KNEE 1

KNEE POINT (M)

(–99 to 99)

Set the knee slope level.

[700]

KNEE SLOPE

[F800]

KNEE SLOPE (M)

KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON

Turns the knee saturation

function on or off.

KNEE SAT LEVEL

WHITE CLIP

(–99 to 99)

Sets the knee saturation level.

OFF/ON

Turns the white clipping function

on or off.

WHITE CLIP LEVEL NTSC: 90.0% to

108.0% to 109.0%

Adjusts the white clipping level.

PAL: 90.0% to 105.0%

to 109.0%

07/—

KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON

Turns the Knee Saturation

function on and off.

[F800]

KNEE 2

KNEE POINT (R)

50.0% to 95.0% to

109.0%

When KNEE SATURATION is

set to OFF, set the RGB knee

point levels and knee slope levels

individually.

KNEE SLOPE (R)

KNEE POINT (G)

(–99 to 99)

50.0% to 95.0% to

109.0%

KNEE SLOPE (G)

KNEE POINT (B)

(–99 to 99)

50.0% to 95.0% to

109.0%

KNEE SLOPE (B)

(–99 to 99)

Menu List

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

08/07 DETAIL 1

DETAIL

OFF/ON

Sets the detail correction function

on or off.

APERTURE

OFF/ON

Turns the aperture correction

function on or off.

DETAIL LEVEL

(–99 to 99)

Sets the general level of the detail

signal.

APERTURE LEVEL

DTL H/V RATIO

(–99 to 99)

Sets the aperture correction level.

Sets the level of the V detail

signal.

CRISPENING

(–99 to 99)

Sets the crispening level.

LEVEL DEPEND

OFF/ON

Turns the level depend function

on or off.

LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)

DETAIL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)

Sets the level of the level depend.

Sets the frequency of the H detail

signal.

09/08 DETAIL 2

KNEE APERTURE

OFF/ON

Turns the knee aperture function

on or off.

KNEE APT LVL

DETAIL LIMIT

(–99 to 99)

Sets the knee aperture level.

Sets the both detail black and

white limiters.

DTL WHT LMT

DTL BLK LMT

(–99 to 99)

Sets the detail white limiter.

Sets the detail black limiter.

Sets the V detail black limiter.

(–99 to 99)

DTL V-BLK LMT

V DTL CREATION

(–99 to 99)

NAM/G/R+G/Y

Selects the source signal of the V

DTL signal.

H/V CONTROL MODE H/V /V

Selects the operation mode of

DTL H/V RATIO on the

DETAIL 1 page.

H/V: H and V increase and

decrease in inverse

proportion

V: V DTL only enabled

Menu List

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

10/09 SD DETAIL

SD DETAIL

OFF/ON

Turns the SD detail correction on

or off.

SD DETAIL LEVEL

(–99 to 99)

Sets the general level of the SD

detail signal.

SD CRISPENING

(–99 to 99)

Sets the SD crispening level.

Sets the SD detail white limiter.

Sets the SD detail black limiter.

SD DTL WHT LIMIT (–99 to 99)

SD DTL BLK LIMIT (–99 to 99)

SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON

Turns the SD level depend

function on or off.

SD LV DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)

SD DTL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)

Sets the level of the SD level

depend.

Sets the frequency of the SD H

detail signal.

SD DTL H/V RATIO

(–99 to 99)

Sets the level of the SD V detail

signal.

SD CROSS COLOR

(When NTSC(J)AREA

or NTSC AREA is

selected on the

Sets the SD cross color reduction

level.

FORMAT page)

Menu List

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

11/10 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL

OFF/ON

Turns on or off all of channels 1,

2 and 3 for the color detail

function.

SKIN DETECT

Moves to color detection Executes the color detail

page.

function.

SKIN AREA IND

OFF/ON

Turns on and off the function that

displays a zebra pattern where

color was detected.

[F800]

When this is ON, a zebra pattern

is output from the following

connectors.

• SDI OUT 2 connector (when all

of the following are true: SDI

OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT

1 page is set to HDSDI, SDI OUT

2 SUPER is set to ON, and either

SUPER(MENU) or

SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER

IMPOSE page is set to ON)

• TEST OUT connector (when both

of the following are true: TEST

OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1

page is set to ON, and

SUPER(MENU) on the SUPER

IMPOSE page is set to ON)

[700]

When this is ON, a zebra pattern

is output from the TEST OUT

connector (when both of the

following are true: TEST OUT

SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page

is set to ON, and

SUPER(MENU) on the SUPER

IMPOSE page is set to ON)

SKIN DTL SELECT

SKIN DETAIL

1/2/3

Selects the type of the color

detail function. The following

items depend on the selected type

of the color detail function.

OFF/ON

Turns the color detail function on

or off for the type selected in the

above item.

SKIN DETAIL LVL

SKIN DTL SAT

(–99 to 99)

Sets the level of the color detail

signal.

Adjusts the saturation level of the

hue possessed by the color detail

function.

SKIN DTL HUE

0 to 359

Adjusts the center phase of the

hue possessed by the color detail

function.

SKIN DTL WIDTH

0 to 39 to 359

Adjusts the width of the hue

possessed by the color detail

function.

Menu List

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

12/11 MTX LINEAR MATRIX

OFF/ON

Turns the linear matrix correction

and user-set matrix correction

functions on or off.

MATRIX(USER)

MATRIX(PRESET)

OFF/ON

Turns the user-set matrix

correction function on or off.

OFF/ON

Turns the preset matrix

correction function on or off.

MATRIX(PRST) SEL 1/2/3/4/5/6

MATRIX(USER) R-G (–99 to 99)

MATRIX(USER) R-B (–99 to 99)

MATRIX(USER) G-R (–99 to 99)

MATRIX(USER) G-B (–99 to 99)

MATRIX(USER) B-R (–99 to 99)

MATRIX(USER) B-G (–99 to 99)

Selects the preset matrix

correction function.

Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set

matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set

matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set

matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set

matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set

matrix coefficients.

Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set

matrix coefficients.

13/12 MTX MULTI MATRIX

OFF/ON

Turns the linear matrix correction

and multi matrix correction

functions on or off.

MATRIX (MULTI)

OFF/ON

Turns the multi matrix correction

function on or off.

MATRIX AREA IND OFF/ON

Turns the zebra indication on or

off in the area corresponding to

the currently selected setting.

MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color detection Detects color.

page.

MTX(MULTI)PRESET EXEC

Return MTX(MULTI)HUE and

MTX(MULTI)SAT values to

preset values for each of the 16

axes.

MTX (MULTI) AXIS B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/ Sets 16 hue axes as the targets of

R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/ the multi matrix correction

G/G+/CY/CY+/B–

function.

MTX (MULTI) HUE

MTX (MULTI) SAT

(–99 to 99)

Sets hue correction values for

each of the 16 axis modes.

(–99 to 99)

Sets saturation correction values

for each of the 16 axis modes.

Menu List

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

V MODULATION

14/13

V MOD

OFF/ON

Turns the V modulation function

on or off.

MASTER VMOD

R VMOD

(–99 to 99)

VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD

OFF/ON

Adjusts the master V modulation

level.

Adjusts the R V modulation

level.

G VMOD

Adjusts the G V modulation

level.

B VMOD

Adjusts the B V modulation

level.

TEST OUT SELECT

Selects the output signal of the

TEST OUT connector.

15/14 SATURATION LOW KEY SAT

L KEY SAT LEVEL

Turns the low key saturation

function on or off.

(–99 to 99)

Sets the saturation level of the

low luminance part.

L KEY SAT RANGE

LOW/L.MID/H.MID/

HIGH

Sets the luminance level at which

the low key saturation function

becomes effective.

Y BLACK GAMMA

OFF/ON

Turns the Y black gamma

function on or off.

Y BLK GAM LEVEL (–99 to 99)

Sets the gamma curve in the low

luminance part.

Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/

Sets the luminance level at which

the Y black gamma becomes

effective.

HIGH

16/15 NOISE

SUPPRESS

17/16 SCENE FILE

NOISE SUPPRESS

OFF/ON

Turn on and off the noise

suppression function.

STANDARD

–

Recalls the scene file saved in the

memory of the camcorder.

STANDARD

Clears all current detail-adjusted

settings and switch settings and

returns the settings to the

standard settings saved in the

reference file.

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID

–

Recalls the scene file from the

memory of the camcorder or the

“Memory Stick”.

Stores the scene file in the

memory of the camcorder or the

“Memory Stick”.

Blank/up to 16

Sets the File ID.

characters

Menu List

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE menu

No.

01/01 WHITE

SHADING SEL

Page

Item

Settings

Description

WHT SHAD CH R/G/B/TEST

Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If

TEST is selected, the setting is linked to the

setting of TEST OUT SELECT.

TEST OUT

VBS/Y/R/G/B/ Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT

SELECT

LCD

connector.

R/G/B WHT H

SAW

(–99 to 99)

H Saw white shading compensation.

R/G/B WHT H

PARA

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

H Parabola white shading compensation.

V Saw white shading compensation.

V Parabola white shading compensation.

R/G/B WHT V

SAW

R/G/B WHT V

PARA

WHITE SAW/

PARA

Turns white shading Saw and Parabola

compensation on and off.

02/02 BLACK

BLK SHAD CH R/G/B/TEST/

LCD

Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If

“TEST” is selected, the setting is the same as the

setting of TEST OUT SELECT.

SHADING SEL

TEST OUT

SELECT

VBS/Y/R/G/B/ Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT

LCD

connector.

R/G/B BLK H

SAW

(–99 to 99)

H Saw black shading compensation.

R/G/B BLK H

PARA

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

H Parabola black shading compensation.

V Saw black shading compensation.

V Parabola black shading compensation.

R/G/B BLK V

SAW

R/G/B BLK V

PARA

BLACK SAW/

PARA

Turns black shading Saw and Parabola

compensation on and off.

MASTER BLACK (–99 to 99)

Master black level adjustment.

MASTER

–6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.

GAIN(TMP)

3dB/6dB/9dB/

12dB/18dB/

24dB/30dB/

36dB/42dB

03/03 LEVEL

ADJUST

VBS VIDEO

LEVEL

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the composite signal video level.

HD-Y LEVEL

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the Y level of the HD component signal.

TEST OUT

SELECT

VBS/Y/R/G/B/ Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT

LCD connector.

Menu List

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

04/04 BATTERY 1 Info BEFORE

END

5%/10%/

15%...95%/

100%

Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is

used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of the

battery at which the BEFORE END warning

should be issued.

Info END

0%/1%/2%/3%/ Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is

4%/5%

used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of the

battery at which the END warning should be

issued.

Sony BEFORE

END

11.5V to 17.0V Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used.

(in 0.1V steps) Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the

BEFORE END warning should be issued.

Sony END

11.0V to 11.5V Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used.

(in 0.1V steps) Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the

END warning should be issued.

Other BEFORE

END

11.5V to 11.8V Used when a battery pack other than a Sony

to 17.0V (in

0.1V steps)

battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the

battery at which the BEFORE END warning

should be issued.

11.0V to 14.0V Used when a battery pack other than a Sony

(in 0.1 V steps) battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the

battery at which the END warning should be

issued.

Other END

DC IN BEFORE 11.5V to 11.8V Used when an external power source is connected

END

to 17.0V (in 0.1 to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of

V steps)

the connected external power source at which the

BEFORE END warning should be issued.

DC IN END

11.0V to 14.0V Used when an external power source is connected

(in 0.1 V steps) to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of

the connected external power source at which the

END warning should be issued.

DETECTED

BATTERY

Info/Sony/Other/ Displays the type of automatically detected

DC IN

battery.

Menu List

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

05/05 BATTERY 2 TYPE

DETECTION

Page

Item

Settings

Description

AUTO/OTHER AUTO: Automatically detects the type of the

battery.

OTHER: Always judges the battery to be of the

“OTHER” type regardless of the actual

battery type.

SEGMENT NO.7 11.0V to 17.0V When the battery type

Battery status

(in 0.1 V steps) judgment is “OTHER”, sets indicator segments

the voltage level below

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

which the battery status

indicator segment No.7

should turn off.

(“E” and “F” are

always on.)

SEGMENT NO.6 11.0V to 16.0V When the battery type

to 17.0V (in 0.1 judgment is “OTHER”, sets

V steps)

the voltage level below

which the battery status

indicator segment No. 6

should turn off.

SEGMENT NO.5 11.0V to 15.0V When the battery type

to 17.0V (in 0.1 judgment is “OTHER”, sets

V steps)

the voltage level below

which the battery status

indicator segment No. 5

should turn off.

SEGMENT NO.4 11.0V to 14.0V When the battery type

to 17.0V (in 0.1 judgment is “OTHER”, sets

V steps)

the voltage level below

which the battery status

indicator segment No. 4

should turn off.

SEGMENT NO.3 11.0V to 13.0V When the battery type

to 17.0V (in 0.1 judgment is “OTHER”, sets

V steps)

the voltage level below

which the battery status

indicator segment No. 3

should turn off.

SEGMENT NO.2 11.0V to 12.0V When the battery type

to 17.0V (in 0.1 judgment is “OTHER”, sets

V steps)

the voltage level below

which the battery status

indicator segment No. 2

should turn off.

SEGMENT NO.1 11.0V to 17.0V When the battery type

(in 0.1 V steps) judgment is “OTHER”, sets

the voltage level below

which the battery status

indicator segment No. 1

should turn off.

Menu List

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

06/06 AUDIO-1

FRONT MIC

SELECT

MONO/STREO Input mode selection for front microphone.

AUDIO CH3/4

MODE

CH1/2/SW

Selects the sources to be recorded to channels CH-

3/4.

CH1/2: Same sources as CH-1/2.

SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-3/

CH-4 switches.

REAR XLR

AUTO

OFF/ON

Turns the XLR connection automatic detection on

or off.

FRONT MIC REF –60dB/–50dB/ Sets the reference level of the front microphone.

–40dB

REAR MIC REF –60dB/–50dB/ Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN CH1

–40dB

connector is set to MIC.

MIN ALARM

VOL

OFF/SET

Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it

is turned all the way down.

OFF: Almost inaudible.

SET: Faintly audible.

SP ATT LEVEL OFF/3dB/6dB/ Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker. Has no

9dB effect on earphone volume.

HEADPHONE

OUT

MONO/STREO Selects whether to make the rear earphone

monaural or stereo.

07/07 AUDIO-2

AU DATA LEN

(IMX)

16bit/24bit

For details, see “Setting the Recording Format”

(page 57).

(When the CBKZ-

MD01 is installed)

AU REF LEVEL –20dB/–18dB/ Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal.

–16dB/–12dB/

EBUL

AU REF OUT

0dB/+4dB/

Sets the output reference level.

–3dB/EBUL

AU CH12 AGC

MODE

MONO/STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input level

adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded

on channels 1 and 2 independently for each

channel, or in stereo mode.

AU CH34 AGC

MODE

MONO/STREO/ Selects whether to perform automatic input level

OFF

adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded

on channels 3 and 4 independently for each

channel, or in stereo mode, or not at all (OFF).

AU AGC SPEC

–6dB/–9dB/

–12dB/–15dB/

–17dB

AGC saturation level setting.

AU LIMITER

MODE

OFF/–6dB/

–9dB/–12dB/

–15dB/–17dB

For manual audio input level adjustment, selects

the limiter saturation level for loud input signals.

AU OUT

LIMITER

OFF/ON

Turns the audio output limiter on or off.

Menu List

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

08/08 AUDIO-3

AU SG (1KHz)

ON/OFF/AUTO Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the

Color Bar mode or not.

ON: A 1 kHz test tone is output during the Color

Bar mode.

OFF: A 1 kHz test tone is not output during the

Color Bar mode.

AUTO: A 1 kHz test tone is output only when the

AUDIO SELECT CH-1 switch on the inside

panel is in the AUTO position.

MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound on

F+S1

CH 1, selects which control is to be used for the

level adjustment.

SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)

FRONT: MIC LEVEL control

F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC

LEVEL control (The two controls are linked

to each other.)

MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound on

F+S2

CH 2, selects which control is to be used for the

level adjustment.

SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)

FRONT: MIC LEVEL control

F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC

LEVEL control (The two controls are linked

to each other.)

REAR1/WRR

LEVEL

SIDE1/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio

F+S1

level of the equipment that is connected to the

wireless microphone and whatever is connected to

the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel.

SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)

FRONT: MIC LEVEL control

F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC

LEVEL control (The two controls are linked

to each other.)

REAR2/WRR

LEVEL

SIDE2/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio

F+S2

level of the equipment that is connected to the

wireless microphone and whatever is connected to

the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel.

SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)

FRONT: MIC LEVEL control

F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC

LEVEL control (The two controls are linked

to each other.)

AUDIO CH3

FIX/FRONT

Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3.

FIX: Fixed

LEVEL

FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL

control on the front panel of the camcorder

AUDIO CH4

FIX/FRONT

Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4.

FIX: Fixed

LEVEL

FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL

control on the front panel of the camcorder

Menu List

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

09/09 WRR

SETTING

Page

Item

Settings

Description

WRR VALID CH ALL/CH1

Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the

wireless receiver, or channel 1 only.

ALL: Enable both channel 1 and 2.

CH1: Enable channel 1 only. Select this setting to

use the wireless receiver as a monaural

receiver.

SEL

WRR CH

TX1/TX2

Specifies the target channel for other items in this

menu.

SELECT

TX1: Channel 1

TX2: Channel 2

WRR DELAY

OFF/ON

Enables or disables the delay compensation

function for wireless audio input.

OFF: Disables the function.

COMP

ON: Enables the function (the audio in all EE

output is delayed by about 8 ms).

TX*(*: channel

–

Displays the name of the transmitter whose

signals are being received on the channel selected

by WRR CH SELECT.

number)

TX* AUDIO

PEAK(*: channel

---/PEAK

Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter

whose signals are being received on the channel

selected by WRR CH SELECT is over the peak.

number)

TX* INPUT

LEVEL(*:channel

MIC/LINE

Displays whether the input level of the transmitter

whose signals are being received on the channel

selected by WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or

LINE.

number)

TX* ATT

LEVEL(*:channel

–

Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose

signals are being received on the channel selected

by WRR CH SELECT (the permissible setting

range may vary depending on the transmitter

device).

number)

TX* LCF

FREQ(*: channel

–

Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the

transmitter whose signals are being received on

the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT (the

permissible setting range may vary depending on

the transmitter device).

number)

TX* SYSTEM

DELAY(*:

AUTO/

0.0ms~8.0ms

When WRR DELAY COMP is set to ON, sets the

amount of audio delay for the channel selected by

WRR CH SELECT.

channel number)

AUTO: Automatically adjusts the amount of

delay so that the delay in the audio received

from the wireless receiver is zero.

0.0ms~8.0ms: Sets the amount of anticipated

wireless system delay, for cases in several

wireless systems are being used over a device

such as an audio mixer.

Menu List

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

10/10 TIMECODE TC OUT

AUTO/GENE

Selects the timecode signal output.

AUTO: Outputs the timecode generator output

during recording and outputs the timecode

reader output during playback.

GENE: Outputs the timecode generator output

during recording and playback.

DF/NDF

(When SYSTEM

DF/NDF

Sets DF or NDF mode.

DF: Drop frame mode

FREQUENCY is

set to “59.94i”)

NDF: Non-drop frame mode

EXT-LK DF/NDF INT/EXT

(When SYSTEM

FREQUENCY is

Selects either internal setting or external setting

for DF/NDF.

INT: Internal

EXT: External

set to “59.94i”)

EXT-LK UBIT

INT/EXT

Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to

an INT or an EXT source when the timecode is

locked to an external source.

INT: Internal lock

EXT: External lock

LTC UBIT

FIX/TIME

Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of LTC.

FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.

TIME: Records the present time.

VITC UBIT (SD) FIX/TIME

(When the CBKZ-

MD01 is installed)

Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of VITC.

FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.

TIME: Records the present time.

WATCH AUTO

ADJ

OFF/ON

Matches the time of the internal clock with the

time data of the user bits of an external timecode.

Turns the automatic time correction function of

the internal clock on or off.

UBIT GROUP ID 000/101

Selects the U-BIT GROUP ID.

VITC INS LINE 1 NTSC: 12H to

Selects the line into which VITC is to be inserted.

(When the CBKZ-

16H to 19H

MD01 is installed) PAL: 9H to 19H

to 22H

VITC INS LINE 2 NTSC: 12H to

(When the CBKZ-

18H to 19H

MD01 is installed) PAL: 9H to 21H

to 22H

11/11 ESSENCE RET SHOT

OFF/ON

For details, see “Recording essence marks” on

page 87.

MARK

MARK 1

RET SHOT

MARK 2

OFF/ON

INDEX PIC. POS 0SEC to 10SEC For details, see “Setting the thumbnail image at

(in 1 sec steps) recording time” on page 88.

FIND MODE

R.ST/CLIP

Specify the frame to be cued up when the PREV

or NEXT button is pressed.

R.ST: The frame where a Rec Start essence mark

is set

CLIP: The first frame of the clip

Menu List

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

12/12 CAM

REC TALLY

OFF/ON

Turns the tally illumination control on or off when

the battery is almost exhausted or the disc is

almost full.

CONFIG 1 BLINK

REC START

BEEP

OFF/ON

Turns on or off the REC START/STOP alarm

sound.

SUB LCD MODE TIMER/OFF/

SEL CONT

Sets the timecode (TC) display after poweroff as

follows.

TIMER: The TC display turns off after the elapse

of the time set by the SUB LCD TIMER

below.

OFF: Not displayed.

CONT: Displayed.

SUB LCD TIMER 1H/3H/8H

Sets the duration of time after which the TC

display is to be turned off after power-off, when

the SUB LCD MODE SEL item, above, is set to

“TIMER” (H: hours).

HDSDI REMOTE OFF/CHARA/ Selects whether to use the function that enables

recording control from this unit of an external

device connected to the CA (camera adapter) or

one of the SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI

I/F

G-TLY/R-TLY

output) of this unit. Also selects the indication

that shows whether the external device is

recording.

OFF: Do not use the remote recording control

function.

CHARA: Use the function, and indicate by the

controlling external device indicator in the

viewfinder (see page 35).

G-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the

TALLY indicator in the viewfinder.

R-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the

REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the

viewfinder.

Note

When R-TLY is selected, the REC indicator lights

even when the unit is not recording.

PROAV DISPLAY DSABL/ENABL Specifies whether to display the PROAV directory

when this unit is accessed by a FAM/FTP

connection.

DSABL: Do not display.

ENABL: Display.

MIXED

DSABL/ENABL For details, see “Mixed recording of clips in

different formats on the same disc” on page 58.

RECORDING

SINGLE CLIP

MODE

OFF/ON

For details, see “Clip playback modes” on page

84.

PB POSITION

KEEP/TOP

When you switch between the clip playback

screen and the clip list playback screen, specifies

the clip or sub clip playback start position.

KEEP: Play from the position where playback

stopped.

TOP: Play from the first frame of the first clip or

sub clip.

Menu List

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

13/13 CAM

TEST SAW

SAW/REC

Selects the test signal.

CONFIG 2 SELECT

COLOR BAR

ARIB/100%/

Selects the HD color bar type.

SELECT

75%/SMPTE

USER & ALL

ONLY

OFF/ON

Show only USER menu in the top menu.

RM COMMON

MEMORY

OFF/ON

Selects whether or not to share settings for when a

remote control unit is connected and when the unit

is used alone.

RM REC START RM/CAM/

When an RM remote control unit is connected,

selects which recording start/stop buttons are

enabled.

PARA

RM: remote control unit

CAM: camcorder

PARA: both

SHT DISP MODE SEC/DEG

Selects shutter speed display (seconds or degrees).

RM F NO

DISPLAY

CTRL/RET

Selects the method used to display IRIS F values

on the MSU-900 or another remote control unit.

CTRL: Display on the basis of control value from

the camera (normal display method).

RET: Display on the basis of position information

from the lens (same method as when AUTO

IRIS is enabled).

FAN CONTROL AUTO/R.MIN/ Specifies the control method for the cooling fan.

MIN

(This setting is retained even when the unit is

powered off.)

AUTO: Control the rotation of the cooling fan

automatically.

R.MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed

during recording only (and stop the rotation

when this unit is used in an environment so

cool that temperatures inside the unit do not

rise).

MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed (and

stop the rotation when this unit is used in an

environment so cool that temperatures inside

the unit do not rise).

Note

Regardless of this setting, the cooling fan rotates

at high speed if temperatures inside the unit rise to

a temperature near the alarm level.

FOCUS MAG SW MTRY/ALT

Selects the method that activates the FOCUS

MAG function when the function is assigned to an

ASSIGN switch.

MTRY: The function is on as long as the switch is

held down.

ALT: Each press of the switch toggles between on

and off. (The function goes off automatically

five seconds after it is turned on.)

Menu List

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

14/14 CAM

CONFIG 3

Page

Item

Settings

Description

ALAC

OFF/AUTO

Specifies whether to activate the aberration

correction function.

OFF: Do not activate.

AUTO: Activate aberration correction when a

lens that supports aberration correction is

mounted.

Note

For some aberration correction lenses, the

aberration correction function may not activate

(“ALAC” does not appear in the viewfinder)

immediately after this unit is powered on, even

when this item is set to “AUTO”. If this occurs,

turn the zoom and focus rings of the lens all the

way to one side, and then check to make sure that

“ALAC” has appeared in the viewfinder.

Contact your dealer or a Sony service

representative for more information about lenses

that support aberration correction.

15/15 PRESET

WHITE

COLOR TEMP

Display

reference color

temperature.

Sets the white balance preset value.

C TEMP BAL (–99 to 99)

Finer setting when the desired color could not be

obtained with the COLOR TEMP color

temperature setting.

R GAIN

G GAIN

(–99 to 99)

OFF/ON

Sets the R gain preset value.

Sets the G gain preset value.

AWB ENABLE

When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST,

turns the function that enables execution of AWB

(auto white balance) on and off.

–/16

ND FILTER

CTEMP

OFF/ON

Turns on and off the function which assigns

electrical CC filters to neutral density (ND) filters.

[700]

WHITE

FILTER

ND FLT CTEMP 3200K/4300K/ Select the color temperatures when the electrical

<1>

5600K/6300K

CC filters are assigned to the ND filters.

ND FLT CTEMP 3200K/4300K/

For details, see “To change the color temperature

when the ND filter is switched” (page 63).

2-4

5600K/6300K

ELECTRICAL

CC<A>

3200K/4300K/ Select the color temperatures selected by

5600K/6300K

electrical CC filter switching, when the electrical

CC filter switching function is assigned to an

ASSIGN switch.

ELECTRICAL

CC

3200K/4300K/

5600K/6300K

For details, see “To switch between electrical CC

filters with an ASSIGN switch” (page 63).

ELECTRICAL

CC<C>

3200K/4300K/

5600K/6300K/

-----

ELECTRICAL

CC<D>

3200K/4300K/

5600K/6300K/

-----

Menu List

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

16/17 DCC

ADJUST

Page

Item

Settings

Description

DCC FUNCTION DCC/FIX

SEL

Enables or disables automatic knee point

adjustment when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set

to CAM, DCC: ON.

DCC: Automatically adjust the knee point

according to the luminance of the subject.

FIX: Set the knee point to a fixed value.

DCC D RANGE 400%/450%/

Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/DCC

switch is set to CAM, DCC: ON.

500%/550%/

600%

DCC POINT

DCC GAIN

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point.

Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value.

Adjusts the DCC reaction speed.

DCC DELAY

TIME

DCC PEAK

FILTER

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the response sensitivity to the peak of the

DCC detected value.

17/18 AUTO IRIS IRIS WINDOW

1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the auto iris detection window.

VAR: variable

IRIS WINDOW

IND

OFF/ON

Turns on and off the function which displays a

frame marker for the auto iris detection window.

IRIS LEVEL

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value.

IRIS APL RATIO (–99 to 99)

Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection peak

value and average value.

IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 Adjusts the width of detection frame when the

auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

IRIS VAR

HEIGHT

20 to 135 to 269 Adjusts the height of detection frame when the

auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

IRIS VAR H POS –460 to 0 to 459 Adjusts the horizontal position of detection frame

when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

IRIS VAR V POS –250 to 0 to 249 Adjusts the vertical position of detection frame

when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.

IRIS SPEED

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the auto iris speed.

CLIP HIGH

LIGHT

OFF/ON

Turns on and off the function which, during auto

iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas by

dulling the reaction to high luminescence.

18/19 GENLOCK GENLOCK

OFF/ON

Turns genlock on and off.

GL HD H PHASE (–99 to 99)

GL SD H PHASE (–99 to 99)

Sets the HD output H phase for genlock operation.

Sets the SD output H phase for genlock operation.

REFERENCE

INTERNAL/

GENLOCK/

SDI IN

Displays the type of reference signal used by this

unit.

19/20 ND COMP ND OFFSET

ADJUST

OFF/ON

Turns on and off the mode which sets ND (neutral

density) filter color compensation values.

CLEAR ND

OFFSET

EXEC

Clear ND filter color compensation values.

Menu List

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

20/21 AUTO

AUTO BLK

EXEC

Executes the auto black shading correction

function.

SHADING SHADING

RESET BLK SHD EXEC

Clear black shading compensation values.

TEST OUT

SELECT

VBS/Y/R/G/B/ Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT

LCD connector.

MASTER

–6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily sets the master gain value.

GAIN(TMP)

3dB/6dB/9dB/

12dB/18dB/

24dB/30dB/

36dB/42dB

21/22 APR

APR

EXEC

Suppresses white flecks by executing the

automatic pixel noise reduction function.

APR(SLS)

(Does not appear

when the

EXEC

Suppresses white flecks in SLS (Slow Speed

Shutter) mode by executing the automatic pixel

noise reduction function.

FORMAT page

item SYSTEM

LINE is set to 720,

the SYSTEM

FREQUENCY

item is set to

59.9P, and the

SCAN MODE

item is set to

23.9P.)

Note

The execution time for this function is about 30

minutes. More time may be required when

temperatures inside the unit are low.

APR PRESET

EXEC

Deletes white flecks data that was added by

execution of the APR and automatic black balance

adjustment functions.

Menu List

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

22/23 NETWORK DHCP

ENABLE/

DISABLE

Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of

the IP address from a DHCP server.

Notes

• IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS

server 1 and 2 cannot be set when DHCP is set to

“ENABLE”.

• To check automatically acquired settings, close the

menu and open it again.

IP ADDRESS

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the IP address of this unit.

192.168.1.10

SUBNET MASK xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets the subnet mask.

255.255.255.0

DEF.GATEWAY xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of the default gateway.

0.0.0.0

LINK SPEED

DUPLEX

DNS1

AUTO/10Mbps/ Sets the communications speed.

100Mbps

AUTO/FULL/ Sets the duplex mode.

HALF

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of DNS server 1.

0.0.0.0

DNS2

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of DNS server 2.

0.0.0.0

UPnP

DISABLE/

Select whether to enable the UPnP (universal plug

ENABL

and play) function.

DISABLE: Disable the UPnP function.

ENABLE: Enable the UPnP function.

NET CFG RESET EXEC

UP CON FIELD/ADPT

CONVERT PROCESS

Reset network settings to the factory defaults.

23/24 UP

Selects the conversion source picture when SD is

upconverted to HD.

FIELD: Use the field picture.

ADPT: Optimize the ratio of conversion from the

frame or field picture.

UC DETAIL

LEVEL

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement by the

upconverter.

UC CRISPENING (–8 to 7)

Sets the amplitude width at which the upconverter

does not emphasize low-amplitude signals.

UC DETAIL

LIMIT

(–99 to 99)

Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement by

the upconverter.

UC LV DEPEND (–8 to 7)

LVL

Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by the

upconverter.

UC DTL

FREQUENCY

3.2M/4.5M/

5.0M/4.0M

Sets the center frequency and frequency

properties of edge enhancement by the

upconverter.

3.2M: 3.2 1.1 MHz

4.5M: 4.5 1.4 MHz

5.0M: 5.0 0.7 MHz

4.0M: 4.0 2.0 MHz

UC DTL H/V

RATIO

(–3 to 4)

Sets the horizontal/vertical ratio of edge

enhancement by the upconverter.

Menu List

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

24/– SHUTTER SHUTTER

SECOND/

DEGREE

Selects the shutter speed display unit.

SECOND: Second units

SELECT

DEGREE: Degree units (shutter opening angle)

See page 67 for more information about degree

unit settings.

ADD

(only when

SHUTTER

360.0 to 180.0 to Registers a shutter degree setting in an empty

4.5 (upper limit number from 1 to 6 (this item is disabled if no

of shutter angle number is empty).

SELECT is set to degrees)

“DEGREE”)

DEL

–

Deletes the setting assigned to a number from 1 to

6 (numbers with no settings assigned cannot be

selected).

(only when

SHUTTER

SELECT is set to

“DEGREE”)

1 to 6

Display only

Displays the shutter opening angle assigned to

number 1 to 6, and the corresponding speed in

second units, as calculated on the basis of the

selected frame rate.This differs as follows,

depending on the setting of SYSTEM

FREQUENCY.

(only when

SHUTTER

SELECT is set to

“DEGREE”)

59.94i, 29.97P: 1: 216.0, 2: 180.0, 3: 90.0, 4:

45.0, 5: 22.5, 6: 11.2

50i, 25P: 1: 180.0, 2: 150.0, 3: 90.0, 4: 45.0, 5:

22.5, 6: 11.2

23.98P: 1: 180.0, 2: 172.8, 3: 144.0, 4: 45.0, 5:

22.5, 6: 11.2

a) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of

Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in

the BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.

d) Flashes once per second when the battery status is

“BEFORE END”, and flashes 4 times per second

when the battery status is “END”.

b) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of

Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the

BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.

c) When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page

is set to “AUTO”, any batteries other than Sony BP-

series batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery

systems are classified as “Others”.

e) A setting for this item is required when AU CH34

AGC MODE in the AUDIO-2 page is set to OFF.

f) A setting for this item is required when the DWR-

S01D Digital Wireless Receiver is installed.

g) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the

OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be

set to HDSDI.

FILE menu

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

01/01 USER FILE

USER FILE LOAD

USER FILE SAVE

F.ID

EXEC

For details, see “Saving and

Recalling User Files” on page

217.

Blank/up to 16

characters

USER PRESET

EXEC

For details, see “Resetting USER

menu settings to the standard

settings” on page 201.

Menu List

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

02/02 USER FILE 2 STORE USR PRESET EXEC

Save settings for items on pages

registered in the USER menu as

the standard settings.

CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC

CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC

Clear the standard setting of pages

registered in the USER menu.

Return the pages registered in the

USER menu to the factory default

state.

LOAD CUSTOM

DATA

OFF/ON

Selects whether to load page and

item customization data when

USER FILE LOAD on the USER

FILE page is executed.

LOAD OUT OF USER OFF/ON

BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF/ON

USER LOAD WHITE OFF/ON

Selects whether to load data for

items on pages not registered in

the USER menu when USER

FILE LOAD on the USER FILE

page is executed.

Selects whether to load data for

items on the pages beyond USER

FILE in the USER menu when

USER FILE LOAD on the USER

FILE page is executed.

Selects whether to load white

balance data when USER FILE

LOAD on the USER FILE page is

executed.

03/03 ALL FILE

ALL FILE LOAD

ALL FILE SAVE

F.ID

–

Load ALL file.

Save ALL file.

Name ALL file.

Blank/up to 16

characters

ALL PRESET

EXEC

Return all items to preset values.

STORE ALL PRESET EXEC

Save the current settings of all

items as preset values.

CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC

Clear the preset values of all

items.

3SEC CLR PRESET

NETWORK DATA

OFF/ON

Turns the following function on

and off: When the CANCEL/

PRST/ESCAPE switch is held on

the CANCEL/PRST side for three

seconds, clear the preset values of

each item.

OFF/ON

Selects whether or not to read in

the network-related data.

Menu List

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

STANDARD

–

Description

04/04 SCENE FILE

For details, see “Saving and

Loading Scene Files” on page

220.

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID

–

STANDARD

05/05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC

Save reference file saved in the

“Memory Stick” in internal

memory.

REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC

REFERENCE LOAD EXEC

Clear reference file.

Load reference file.

REFERENCE SAVE

EXEC

Save reference file to “Memory

Stick”.

F.ID

Blank/up to 16

Enter reference file name.

characters

SCENE WHITE DATA OFF/ON

Selects whether to load white

balance data when SCENE

RECALL or STANDARD on the

SCENE FILE page is executed.

06/—

GAMMA LOAD

EXEC

Loads user-created gamma table

data (a user gamma file) from a

“Memory Stick” into internal

memory.

[F800]

USER

GAMMA

GAMMA RESET

EXEC

—

Clears a user gamma file from

internal memory.

F.ID

Displays the name of the user

gamma file in internal memory.

F.ID

—

Displays the name of a user

gamma file in a “Memory Stick”.

DATE

—

Displays the date and time of

creation of a user gamma file in a

“Memory Stick”.

Menu List

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

Load lens file.

Save lens file.

07/06 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL EXEC

LENS FILE STORE

F.ID

EXEC

No Offset/up to 16

characters

Sets the name of the last selected

lens file.

SOURCE

MEMORY1

Displays the number of last

loaded lens file.

LENS NO OFFSET

EXEC

Clear lens file.

LENS AUTO

RECALL

OFF/ON/S.No

Specifies whether to automatically

load the lens file of a lens that

supports serial communications.

OFF: Do not use the lens file

function.

ON: Load the lens file

corresponding to the lens

model name, and reflect the

contents of the file.

S.No: If the lens can communicate

its serial number, load the

lens file corresponding to the

lens model name and serial

number, and reflect the

contents of the file. If the lens

serial number cannot be

communicated, load the lens

file corresponding to the lens

model name (same as the ON

setting).

L.ID

—

Display the name of the connected

lens that supports serial

communications.

L.MF

Display the manufacturer of the

connected lens that supports serial

communications.

08/07 LENS FILE 2

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the lens file V SAW

shading compensation.

LENS M VMOD

–480 to 0 to 479

–270 to 0 to 269

Compensates the horizontal

position of lens file center marker.

LENS CENTER H

LENS CENTER V

Compensates the vertical position

of lens file center marker.

TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD

Selects the signal output of the

TEST OUT connector.

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the lens file flare (R).

Adjusts the lens file flare (G).

Adjusts the lens file flare (B).

LENS R FLARE

LENS G FLARE

LENS B FLARE

Adjusts the white balance (R)

compensation value of the lens

file.

LENS W-R OFST

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the white balance (B)

compensation value of the lens

file.

LENS W-B OFST

Menu List

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Settings

Description

09/08 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL

R/G/B/TEST

Selects the channel adjusted by

this menu. If TEST is selected, the

setting is linked to the setting of

TEST OUT SELECT.

TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD

Selects the signal output of the

TEST OUT connector.

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the H Saw white shading

compensation.

LENS R/G/B H SAW

LENS R/G/B H

Adjusts the H Parabola white

shading compensation.

PARA

(–99 to 99)

Adjusts the V Saw white shading

compensation.

LENS R/G/B V SAW

LENS R/G/B V

Adjusts the V Parabola white

shading compensation.

PARA

10/09 MEMORY

STICK

M.S. FORMAT

EXEC

Format “Memory Stick”.

M.S. IN > JUMP TO

OFF/USER/ALL/

For details, see “Jumping to a

SCENE/LENS/REFER/ File-Related Menu Page When

USER1

Inserting a “Memory Stick”” on

page 223.

a) “EX” is displayed when the extender is on, and “08”

is displayed when the shrinker is on.

DIAGNOSIS menu

No.

Page

Item

Description

01/01 HOURS

METER

OPERATION

Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in

units of hours.

LASER

Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical

heads.

OPERATION (rst)

SPINDLE (rst)

LOADING (rst)

SEEK (rst)

Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in

units of hours (reset possible).

Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating, in

units of hours (reset possible).

Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded

(reset possible).

Displays the total seek time by the optical heads, in units of

hours (reset possible).

02/02 TIME/DATE

ADJUST

HOUR

MIN

For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock”

on page 43.

SEC

YEAR

MONTH

DAY

Menu List

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Page

Item

Description

03/03 ROM VERSION PACKAGE: X.XX

Displays ROM version.

SY1: X.XX

SY2K: X.XX

SY2U: X.XX

DRV: X.XX

AT: X.XX

FP: X.XX

04/04 ROM VERSION LVIS: X.XX

TSYS: X.XX

TMBP: X.XX

FAM: X.XX

LABY: X.XX

BRDG: X.XX

PIER: X.XX

CAVA: X.XX

05/05 ROM VERSION DSP0: X.XX

DSP2: X.XX

PRXA: X.XX

06/06 DEV STATUS I/O: MS, FP, CN,

DCP, VF

Displays the status of each internal device of this unit.

D/A: DCP1, DCP2,

DCP3

EEPROM: CN, DCP,

FRAM: AT

FAN: MB

LSI: DCP1, DCP2,

DCP3, DCP4, TG

SCI: SY, RM

07/07 OPTION

HD/SD-SDI INPUT a appears when the optional CBK-HD01 HD/SD SDI Input

Board is installed.

COMPOSITE INPUT a appears when the optional CBK-SC02 Analog Composite

Input Board is installed.

a appears when the optional CBKZ-MD01 SD Record and

Playback Software is installed.

[700]

SD REC & PB

a appears when the optional CBKZ-FC01 23.98P Record

and Playback Software is installed.

[700]

24P REC & PB

Menu List

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

indicating the current status of the camcorder

appears on the viewfinder screen.

Menu Operations

For details, see “Selecting the display items” on

page 201.

To display the TOP menu

With no menu displayed on the screen, hold down

the MENU knob and set the MENU ON/OFF

switch to ON.

Displaying menus

Depending on the internal switch settings, display of

the TOP menu may be disabled. For details, refer to

the Maintenance Manual.

Basic menu operations

By pressing and turning the MENU knob, you can

set various menu items. In the remainder of this

section, the LCD monitor is generally shown as

an example of the menu display, but a similar

display also appears on the viewfinder screen.

To select the setting items and values on

the menu

Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases

explained below.

5 4 32

1 Viewfinder

2 LCD monitor

3 DISP SEL/EXPAND button

4 MENU ON/OFF switch

5 POWER switch

To use the MENU ON/OFF switch, open the

cover of the menu operating section.

When the camcorder is powered on, set the

MENU ON/OFF switch to ON to display the

menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD

monitor.

If this is the first time the menu has been used

after the camcorder has been powered on, the

USER menu is displayed. If the menu has been

used before, the last accessed page appears.

When the menu is not displayed on the LCD

monitor

Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button below the

LCD monitor to select the CHAR display.

To clear the menu display from the

screen

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. (When

the cover of the menu operating section is closed,

this switch is automatically set to OFF.)

When the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT

switch on the viewfinder is set to on, the display

Menu Operations

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To scroll pages

?001 OUTPUT1

TOP

OFF

?005 REC FUNCTION

CACHE/INTVAL REC:

TOP

OFF

SDI OUT1 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

TEST OUT SELECT:

TEST OUT SUPER :

VBS

OFF

DISC EXCHG CACHE:

OFF

CLIP CONT REC

(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)

When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to switch pages.

To select a menu or setting item

001 OUTPUT1

TOP

OFF

001 OUTPUT1

TOP

SDI OUT1 SELECT:

OFF

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

TEST OUT SELECT:

TEST OUT SUPER :

VBS

OFF

TEST OUT SELECT:

TEST OUT SUPER :

VBS

OFF

When b appears, turn the MENU knob to move b up and down.

To change a setting value

001 OUTPUT1

TOP

OFF

001 OUTPUT1

TOP

OFF

SDI OUT1 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

TEST OUT SELECT:?

TEST OUT SUPER :

VBS

OFF

TEST OUT SELECT:?

TEST OUT SUPER :

OFF

When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to change the setting (ON/OFF, value, etc.).

To confirm the selection of a menu, a

setting item, or a setting value

Each time you press the MENU knob, the menu

display switches in the following sequence.

Menu Operations

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: When using the OPERATION menu

TOP menu

CONTENTS page

?000 CONTENTS

TOP

USER

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE

ALL

OPERATION

PAINT

MAINTENANCE

FILE

DIAGNOSIS

ADVANCED

01.OUTPUT 1

02.OUTPUT 2

03.SUPERIMPOSE

04.LCD

05.REC FUNCTION

06.ASSIGNABLE SW

07.POWER SAVE

08.VF DISP 1

09.VF DISP 2

10.VF DISP 3

If the menu

has not been

used

If the menu has

been used before

Menu selection mode

Menu selection page

000 CONTENTS

TOP

?001 OUTPUT1

TOP

OFF

01.OUTPUT 1

02.OUTPUT 2

SDI OUT1 SELECT:

03.SUPERIMPOSE

04.LCD

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

05.REC FUNCTION

06.ASSIGNABLE SW

07.POWER SAVE

08.VF DISP 1

09.VF DISP 2

10.VF DISP 3

TEST OUT SELECT:

TEST OUT SUPER :

VBS

OFF

Setting item selection mode

001 OUTPUT1

TOP

OFF

SDI OUT1 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

TEST OUT SELECT:

TEST OUT SUPER :

VBS

OFF

Setting value selection mode

001 OUTPUT1

TOP

OFF

SDI OUT1 SELECT:?

SDI OUT2 SELECT:

SDI OUT2 SUPER :

OFF

TEST OUT SELECT:

TEST OUT SUPER :

VBS

OFF

Note

If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the

camcorder is powered on, “TOP” does not appear at the

upper right on the above screen, and you cannot go to the

TOP menu. In this case, follow the procedure in “To

display the TOP menu” (page 193).

Menu Operations

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

195

When you set items on the ALL,

To display the TOP menu when another

menu is displayed

Move b to “TOP” displayed at the top right of

each page of the menu, and press the MENU

knob. Or flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch repeatedly to ESCAPE until the TOP

menu is displayed.

OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE,

FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus, move b to

the menu that contains the desired item in the

TOP menu, and then press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob until the desired

page appears.

?U05 REC FUNCTION

CACHE/INTVAL REC:

TOP

OFF

Using the USER menu (example

menu operation)

DISC EXCHG CACHE:

OFF

CLIP CONT REC

This section explains menu operations using the

USER menu as an example. The operations are

the same for the ALL, OPERATION, PAINT,

MAINTENANCE, and DIAGNOSIS menus.

(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)

For details about how to operate the USER MENU

CUSTOMIZE menu, see “Editing the USER menu”

(page 197).

Press the MENU knob.

b and z appear.

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.

Normally, the USER menu appears.

If it does not, turn the MENU knob to move

b to USER in the TOP menu, and press the

MENU knob.

U05 REC FUNCTION

CACHE/INTVAL REC:

TOP

OFF

DISC EXCHG CACHE:

OFF

CLIP CONT REC

If the USER menu has been used before, the

last accessed page appears. In this case, go to

step 2.

If this is the first time the USER menu has

been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the

USER menu appears. In this case, follow the

procedure below.

Turn the MENU knob to move b to the

desired item, and then press the MENU

knob.

b changes to z, and z changes to ?.

1 Press the MENU knob. Then turn the

MENU knob to move b to the desired

page number.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting.

Depending on the direction of turning the

knob, the setting value increases, decreases,

switches between ON and OFF, and so on.

?U00 CONTENTS

TOP

01.OUTPUT 1

02.OUTPUT 2

03.SUPERIMPOSE

04.LCD

05.REC FUNCTION

06.ASSIGNABLE SW

07.VF DISP 1

08.VF DISP 2

09.'!' LED

To interrupt changing the settings

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON

again, the values that were displayed when

you interrupted the setting operations will

reappear so you can continue making

settings.

10.MARKER 1

This indicates that the menu

screen can be scrolled.

Press the MENU knob.

z changes to b, and ? changes to z. The

selection is confirmed.

2 Press the MENU knob again.

The page selected in 1 is displayed.

Go to step 3.

Menu Operations

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

196

To continue setting other items on the

same page, repeat steps from 4 to 6.

To move to another page

?U05 REC FUNCTION

CACHE/INTVAL REC:

TOP

OFF

To end the menu operation, set the

MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

The menu disappears from the screen, and

the display indicating the current status of the

camcorder appears along the top and bottom

of the screen.

DISC EXCHG CACHE:

CLIP CONT REC

OFF

To cancel a change or return to the

standard settings

(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)

When ? appears in front of the page number

Turn the MENU knob to switch pages.

Note

Depending on the setting item, in some cases only the

function to return to the standard setting is valid.

When nothing appears in front of the page

number

Turn the MENU knob to move b to the page

number, and press the MENU knob. Then turn the

MENU knob to switch pages.

Before pressing the MENU knob in step

6 of the above procedure, flick the

CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the

CANCEL/PRST position.

Editing the USER menu

The message “CANCEL DATA OK?”

appears.

The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows

you to configure a USER menu that consists only

of pages and items that you need by adding,

deleting or replacing the pages.

Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch to the CANCEL/PRST position

again.

The message “CANCEL DATA” appears to

indicate that the change has been cancelled.

To add a new page

The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows

you to add a new page to the USER menu.

While the EDIT page contains factory-preset

items, the EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 pages

are all blank in their initial state. You can register

up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of

these pages.

To return to the standard settings after

pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the

above procedure, flick the CANCEL/

PRST/ESCAPE switch to the

CANCEL/PRST position.

The message “PRESET DATA OK?”

appears on the screen.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch to the CANCEL/PRST position

again.

Display the TOP menu (see page 193).

This returns to the standard settings.

Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE,

and press the MENU knob.

If this is the first time the USER MENU

CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the

CONTENTS page of the menu appears.

Menu Operations

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

?E00 CONTENTS

TOP

?P00 CONTENTS

TOP

01.EDIT PAGE

01.OUTPUT 1

02.OUTPUT 2

03.SUPERIMPOSE

04.LCD

05.REC FUNCTION

06.ASSIGNABLE SW

07.POWER SAVE

08.VF DISP 1

09.VF DISP 2

10.VF DISP 3

02.EDIT USER 1

03.EDIT USER 2

04.EDIT USER 3

05.EDIT USER 4

06.EDIT USER 5

07.EDIT USER 6

08.EDIT USER 7

09.EDIT USER 8

10.EDIT USER 9

Add the items as follows.

If the CONTENTS page is displayed,

press the MENU knob. Then select one

of EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19, and

press the MENU knob.

1 Press the MENU knob, scroll the page

until the desired item appears, and then

press the MENU knob again.

2 Press the MENU knob again, select the

desired item, and then press the MENU

knob.

If a different page other than the

CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the

MENU knob until the desired page appears,

then press the MENU knob.

The EDIT USER 9 page appears again,

displaying the newly added item.

Example: when the EDIT USER 9 page is

selected

Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining

items.

E10 EDIT USER 9

TOP

You can add up to 10 items on one page.

To delete items from a page by using the

CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

item that you want to delete.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

line where you want to add an item, and

press the MENU knob.

Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.

The message “DELETE ITEM OK?”

appears.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

EDIT FUNCTION

INSERT

ESC

MOVE

DELETE

BLANK

Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch to the CANCEL/PRST position

again.

To delete items from a page by using the menu

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new

Select INSERT, and press the MENU

knob.

The following menu appears.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

item that you want to delete, and press

the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Menu Operations

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

198

To add a page

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Select DELETE, and press the MENU

knob.

The previously displayed page appears

again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES

b NO” appears.

Display the TOP menu (see page 193).

Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE,

and press the MENU knob.

Select YES, and press the MENU knob.

To replace items on a page

If this is the first time the USER MENU

CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the

CONTENTS page appears. If the menu has

been used before, the last accessed page

appears.

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

item that you want to replace, and press

the MENU knob.

If the CONTENTS page is displayed,

press the MENU knob. Then select

EDIT PAGE, and press the MENU

knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select MOVE, and press the MENU

knob.

The previously displayed page appears

again.

If a different page is displayed, turn the

MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen

appears.

The EDIT PAGE appears.

Select the position to which you want to

move the item, and press the MENU

knob.

The item selected in step 2 moves to the

position that you selected in step 4.

?E01 EDIT PAGE

TOP

01.OUTPUT 1

02.OUTPUT 2

03.SUPERIMPOSE

04.LCD

05.REC FUNCTION

06.ASSIGNABLE SW

07.VF DISP 1

08.VF DISP 2

09.'!' LED

To insert a blank line

10.MARKER 1

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

position where you want to add the

page, and press the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

item that you want to replace, and press

the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select INSERT, and press the MENU

knob.

The CONTENTS page appears.

Select BLANK, and press the MENU

knob.

The previously displayed page appears

again, and a blank line is inserted above the

specified item.

Select the desired page, and press the

MENU knob.

The number and name of the page selected in

step 6 is added above the item selected in

step 4.

Note

You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items

have already been registered.

To cancel adding a page

To add/delete/replace pages

Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6,

select ESC at the top right of the screen, and

press the MENU knob.

You can add a new page to the USER menu,

delete a page from the USER menu, or replace

pages, using the EDIT PAGE of the USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.

Menu Operations

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST/

ESCAPE switch

To rename pages

The names of pages (USER 1 to USER 19)

created with EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19

can be changed. (The maximum name length is

15 characters.)

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”

(page 199).

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

page that you want to delete.

Note

The ASSIGN ITEM SEL page cannot be renamed.

Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.

The message “DELETE PAGE OK?”

appears.

Display the EDIT PAGE NAME1 or

EDIT PAGE NAME2 of the USER

MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

EDIT PAGE NAME1: To rename USER1

to USER10

Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch to the CANCEL/PRST position

again.

EDIT PAGE NAME2: To rename USER11

to USER19

To delete a page by using the menu

E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP

USER1 : USER 1

USER2 : USER 2

USER3 : USER 3

USER4 : USER 4

USER5 : USER 5

USER6 : USER 6

USER7 : USER 7

USER8 : USER 8

USER9 : USER 9

USER10: USER 10

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”

(page 199).

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

page that you want to delete, and press

the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select DELETE, and press the MENU

knob.

The previously displayed page appears

again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES

b NO” appears at the upper right.

Select the page that you want to rename

(USER 1 to USER 19), and press the

MENU knob.

A character table appears.

Select YES, and press the MENU knob.

E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP

USER1 :?

To replace pages

USER2 : USER 2

USER3 : USER 3

USER4 : USER 4

USER5 : USER 5

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”

(page 199).

!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678

9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

QRSTUVWXYZ[©]abcdefghijk

lmnopqrstuvwxyz~

Press the MENU knob. Then select the

page that you want to move, and press

the MENU knob.

INS DEL RET

ESC END

Follow steps 3 and 4 described in

“Setting the shot ID” on page 205 to

enter characters.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select MOVE, and press the MENU

knob.

The previous screen appears again.

When you have finished entering the

name, turn the MENU knob to move x

to END, and press the MENU knob.

The entered name is now displayed.

Select the position to which you want to

move the page, and press the MENU

knob.

The page selected in step 2 is moved to the

position.

Menu Operations

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

200

E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP

Setting the Status

Display on the

Viewfinder Screen and

the LCD Monitor

USER1 : SPECIAL ITEM

USER2 : USER 2

USER3 : USER 3

USER4 : USER 4

USER5 : USER 5

USER6 : USER 6

USER7 : USER 7

USER8 : USER 8

USER9 : USER 9

USER10: USER 10

This section explains the menu settings for the

display of the viewfinder screen. These settings

are also used for the display of the LCD monitor

in the same way.

Resetting USER menu settings to

the standard settings

You can return all settings in the USER menu to

standard settings.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Selecting the display items

To select the items to be displayed on the

viewfinder screen (with the viewfinder

DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch set

to on) and the LCD monitor, use the

VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP 3 pages of

the OPERATION menu.

Display the USER FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

?F01 USER FILE

TOP

USER FILE LOAD : EXEC

USER FILE SAVE : EXEC

Display the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or

VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

F.ID : ^{ssssssssssssssss}

USER PRESET

: EXEC

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

“Change confirmation/adjustment progress

Press the MENU knob, then select

USER PRESET, and press the MENU

knob.

The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO”

appears.

Select the desired setting item, and

press the MENU knob.

On the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP

3 pages, you can select any of the following

items to turn its display on or off.

F01 USER FILE

PRESET OK?

TOP

YES NO

VF DISP 1 page

USER FILE LOAD : EXEC

USER FILE SAVE : EXEC

Item

Description

VF DISP

Turning on or off the

F.ID : ^{ssssssssssssssss}

viewfinder display

USER PRESET

: EXEC

VF DISPLAY

MODE

Selecting the display

mode

DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator

DISP FILTER

DISP WHITE

Types of the ND filter

White balance memory

indicator

Select YES, and press the MENU knob.

The message “COMPLETE” appears, and

the settings for all items in the USER menu

are reset to the standard settings.

DISP GAIN

Gain indicator

DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS

mode indicator

DISP AUDIO

Audio level indicator

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

201

VOLT: The voltage (VOLT) is displayed

Item

Description

continuously.

DISP DISC

Remaining disc capacity

indicator

VF DISP 3 page

DISP IRIS

Iris opening indicator

Item

Description

a) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or

off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/

ASPECT switch on the viewfinder.

LOW LIGHT Turns on and off the on-

screen warning that the

average level of the video has

dropped beneath a set level.

b) For detailed information on the display mode, see

messages” (page 202).

LOW LIGHT Sets the LOW LIGHT

LEVEL

threshold value.

VF DISP 2 page

VF BATT

WARNING

Specifies the remaining

battery capacity level that

starts the flashing warning in

the viewfinder.

Item

Description

DISP ZOOM

DISP COLOR

TEMP

Zoom position indicator

Displays the color

temperature.

ABSOLUTE

VALUE

Turns on and off the mode

that displays numeric menu

DISP BATT

Displays the battery

voltage/remaining capacity

of an internal battery pack

or an external battery

connected to the DC IN

connector.

settings as absolute values.

REMAIN

a) This makes it possible to display settings that

include reference settings, stored with STORE

ALL PRESET or other functions, as absolute

values.

DISP DC IN

Displayed when the power

is supplied from an external

battery connected to the

DC IN connector.

Turn the MENU knob to select the

desired setting (ON, OFF, or value), and

press the MENU knob.

DISP 16:9/4:3

Displays the video aspect

ratio (16:9 or 4:3). (When

the CBKZ-MD01 is

installed.)

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

DISP WRR RF Displays the reception level

Change confirmation/adjustment

progress messages

LVL

of the wireless microphone.

Displays the recording

format.

DISP REC

FORMAT

DISP CLIP

NO(PB)

You can limit or suppress the messages that give

details of setting changes and adjustment

progress and results by setting a display mode.

The conditions under which messages are

displayed and their correspondence with the

display mode are as follows:

Displays clip information.

DISP

Displays the timecode.

TIMECODE

DISP ALAC

Aberration correction

function display

a) When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP-

GL65/GL95 battery pack is installed, the

remaining battery power is shown as a

percentage value (%) according to the setting of

this item.

Y: Message is displayed.

N: Message is not displayed.

Message display

condition

Message

Display

mode

INT: When one of the above batteries is

installed, the remaining power is shown as a

percentage value (%) when there is a change

in the value or when the power is low.

AUTO: The remaining power is shown as a

percentage value (%) when one of the above

batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage

(VOLT) is displayed continuously.

setting

When the filter

selection has been n = 1, 2, 3, 4)

changed

FILTER: n (where N N Y

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

202

Display the MARKER 1 or MARKER 2

page of the OPERATION menu, and

press the MENU knob.

Message display

condition

Message

Display

mode

setting

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

When the gain

setting has been

changed

GAIN: n (where n N N Y

= –6dB, –3dB, 0dB,

3dB, 6dB, 9dB,

12dB, 18dB, 24dB,

30dB, 36dB, 42dB)

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

You can set the following items on the

When the setting of WHITE: n (where n N N Y

MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 pages.

the WHITE BAL

switch has been

changed

= A CH, B CH,

PRESET) or ATW:

RUN

MARKER 1 page

Item

Description

When the

DCC: ON (or OFF) N Y Y

MARKER

To hide all markers, set to

“OFF”.

OUTPUT/DCC

switch has been set

to DCC ON or OFF

When the shutter

speed and mode

setting has been

CENTER

To display the center marker,

set to “ON”.

:SHUTTER:

N Y Y

CENTER

MARK

Selects the position of the

center marker.

1/100 (or 1/125,

1/250, 1/500, 1/

1000, 1/2000, ECS)

SAFETY

ZONE

To display the safety zone, set

to “ON”.

changed

When the black or E.g. AWB : OK

white balance has

been adjusted

SAFETY

AREA

Selects the safety zone range

(80%, 90%, 92.5% or 95%).

To display the aspect marker,

set to “ON”.

ASPECT

a) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the

SHUTTER selector is set to ON.

ASPECT

SELECT

ASPECT

Selects the aspect mode (15:9/

14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/2.35).

To make the areas out of the

selected aspect marker dimmer,

set to “ON”.

Changing the display mode

MASK

Display the VF DISP 1 page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

ASPECT

To set the mask level, when the

MASK LVL ASPECT MASK is set to

“ON”.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

100%

To display the effective pixel

area, set to “ON”.

MARKER

Select VF DISP MODE, and press the

MENU knob.

a) The ASPECT MASK setting affects the

viewfinder and LCD monitor display. In the

following cases, it also affects the VBS signal.

• When TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1

page is set to VBS.

Select the desired display mode, and

press the MENU knob.

• When both TEST OUT SUPER on the

OUTPUT 1 page and SUPER(MARKER) on

the SUPER IMPOSE page are set to ON.

On the PDW-700, ASPECT MASK is ignored

for displays in the viewfinder when the following

are true.

• TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page

is set to HD-Y, and a cable is connected to the

TEST OUT connector.

Setting the marker display

Switch the display of the center and safety zone

markers on or off, and select whether the area

indicated by the safety zone marker is 80%, 90%,

92.5%, or 95% of the screen area.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

• TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page

is set to HD-Y, and TEST OUT SAVE on the

POWER SAVE page is set to OFF.

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

203

b) On the PDW-F800, 100% MARKER is disabled

when the focus assist indicator is displayed.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Note

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

You can set the following items on the VF

The four items ASPECT, ASPECT SELECT,

ASPECT MASK, and ASPECT MASK LVL are

ignored when the recording format is IMX50/40/30

or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4:3.

SETTING page.

Item

Description

MARKER 2 page

ZEBRA

Turns the zebra display on or

Item

Description

a), b)

off.

Turns the display of the box

cursor on and off.

USER BOX

ZEBRA

Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or

BOTH.

SELECT

ZEBRA 1

DET. LVL

ZEBRA 1

APT. LVL

USER BOX Sets the width of the box

WIDTH

Adjusts the level of the zebra 1

(20% to 70% to 107%) display.

Adjusts the aperture level of the

zebra 1 display. (1% to 10% to

20%)

cursor (distance from center to

left or right edge).

USER BOX Sets the height of the box

HEIGHT

cursor (distance from center to

top or bottom edge).

ZEBRA 2

DET. LVL

Adjusts the level of the zebra 2

(52% to 100% to 109%)

display.

USER BOX Sets the horizontal position of

H POS the center of the box cursor.

USER BOX Sets the vertical position of the

V POS center of the box cursor.

CENTER H Sets the horizontal position of

POS the center marker.

CENTER V Sets the vertical position of the

VF DETAIL Adjusts the sharpness of the

LEVEL viewfinder (–99 to 99).

VF ASPECT Specifies whether to set the

(SD)

viewfinder screen and LCD

monitor aspect ratio

automatically or to set it to 16:9

when the IMX50/40/30 or

DVCAM recording format is

selected.

POS

center marker.

ASPECT

Turns the display of the aspect

SAFE ZONE safety zone on and off.

ASPECT Selects the range of the aspect

SAFE AREA safety zone (80%/90%/92.5%/

95%).

When “16:9” is selected, then

the screen is always displayed

as a 16:9 screen (before being

cut out to 4:3), even when

ASPECT RATIO (SD) is set to

“4:3”.

a) On the PDW-F800, USER BOX is disabled when

the focus detection range frame is displayed.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting, and press the MENU knob.

a) If you are using a viewfinder which is not

equipped with a ZEBRA switch, use this item to

turn the display on and off. If you are using a

viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch, you can turn

the display on and off either with the ZEBRA

switch or with this menu operation.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

Setting the viewfinder

b) On the PDW-F800, the zebra display is included

in the HDSDI signals output from the SDI OUT

2 connector when all of the following are true.

• SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page

is set to HDSDI.

• Both SDI OUT 2 SUPER on the OUTPUT 1

page and SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER

IMPOSE page are set to ON.

You can make settings for viewfinder screen

display functions.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the VF SETTING page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting, and press the MENU knob.

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

204

a) To carry out superimposed recording, select the

SHOT ID number (1 to 4). Not to carry out

superimposed recording, select “OFF”.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

Turn the MENU knob to select whether

or not to record the selected item

superimposed on the color bars or the

SHOT ID number, and press the

MENU knob.

Recording shot data

superimposed on the color bars

In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu, you

can select which shot data is recorded

superimposed on the color bars. You can also

select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set in the

SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on

the picture.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

To carry out superimposed recording

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

To actually record the items selected for

superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page,

set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to BARS, DCC

OFF.

The items selected for superimposed recording

appear on the screen and are recorded

superimposed on the color bars.

Display the SHOT DISP page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

Example display: when SHOT DATA is set to

You can set the following items on the SHOT

DISP page.

Item

Description

08/03/15

SHOT

DATE

Selects whether or not the shot

data is superimposed (ON or

OFF).

SHOT

TIME

Selects whether or not shot time

is superimposed (ON or OFF).

Selects whether or not the model

name is superimposed (ON or

OFF).

SHOT

MODEL

NAME

SHOT

SERIAL

NO.

Setting the shot ID

Selects whether or not the serial

number is superimposed (ON or

OFF).

You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric

characters, spaces, and symbols.

When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS,

DCC OFF, this shot ID is output with the color

bar signal. You can set four shot IDs (ID-1 to

ID-4).

SHOT ID Selects whether or not the shot

SEL

ID set on the SHOT ID page is

superimposed.

SHOT 16:9 Turns the following function on

Note

CHARA

and off: When displaying aspect

ratio 4:3 video, record

superimposed “16:9” in the

locations where 16:9 video is

cut.

When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed

even if the color bar signal is output.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

SHOT

BLINK

CHARA

Selects whether or not the

blinking * is superimposed (ON

or OFF).

Display the SHOT ID page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

205

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

017 SHOT ID

TOP

ID-1 :?+

ID-2 : ^ssssssssssss

ID-3 : ssssssssssss

ID-4 : ssssssssssss

017 SHOT ID

TOP

ID-1 : ^ssssssssssss

ID-2 : ssssssssssss

ID-3 : ssssssssssss

ID-4 : ssssssssssss

!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678

9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk

lmnopqrstuvwxyz~

INS DEL RET

ESC END

Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining

characters.

Select one of ID-1 to ID-4, and press the

MENU knob.

A x mark appears over the first character

position in the string, and characters can now

be input.

When the input is complete, turn the

MENU knob to move the x mark over

END, then press the MENU knob.

This ends the input, and returns to the

original SHOT ID page.

017 SHOT ID

ID-1 :?

ID-2 : ssssssssssss

ID-3 : ssssssssssss

ID-4 : ssssssssssss

TOP

To insert a space

In step 3 above, move the x mark over INS, and

press the MENU knob.

To cancel inserting a space, move the x mark

over RET, then press the MENU knob.

!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678

9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk

lmnopqrstuvwxyz~

INS DEL RET

ESC END

To delete a character

In step 3 of “Setting the shot ID” (page 205),

move the x mark over DEL, and press the

MENU knob.

Enter or change the shot ID.

When you are entering the whole shot ID, go

to 2.

This deletes the character under the x mark in the

shot ID row.

To cancel deleting the character, move the x

mark over RET, and press the MENU knob.

1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x

mark to the character which you want

to change, then press the MENU knob.

017 SHOT ID

ID-1 :?

ID-2 : ssssssssssss

ID-3 : ssssssssssss

ID-4 : ssssssssssss

TOP

To cancel changing shot ID

Before executing step 5 of “Setting the shot ID”

(page 205), move the b mark over ESC, then

press the MENU knob or flick the CANCEL/

PRST/ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE.

!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678

9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk

lmnopqrstuvwxyz~

INS DEL RET

ESC END

Displaying the status

confirmation screens

2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark

moves to the character position that

you want to select, then press the

MENU knob.

You can confirm the settings or status of the

camcorder on the LCDs by displaying the

following four screen.

ABNORMAL <!> screen

This window allows you to confirm why the !

(warning) indicator lights in the viewfinder.

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

206

You can use the ‘!’ LED page of the

OPERATION menu to set whether or not the !

(warning) indicator lights.

Item

Description

STATUS

Selects whether or not the

ABNORMAL ABNORMAL window is

displayed (ON or OFF).

SYSTEM screen

This screen displays information such as the

system frequency, the recording format, whether

output from the TEST OUT connector is on or

off, and the type of output signal.

STATUS

SYSTEM

STATUS

Displays (ON) or hides

(OFF) the SYSTEM menu.

Selects whether or not the

FUNCTION window is

displayed (ON or OFF).

Selects whether or not the

STATUS AUDIO window is

displayed (ON or OFF).

FUNCTION

FUNCTION screen

STATUS

AUDIO

This screen displays the functions assigned to the

ASSIGN switches, the detection level, and other

information.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting, and press the MENU knob.

AUDIO STATUS screen

This screen allows you to confirm the following

items related to audio.

• Audio bit rate

• Setting condition of DF/NDF

• Type of front microphone

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

• Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4

• Input level of audio channels 1 to 4

You can use the SET STATUS page of the

OPERATION menu to set whether or not the

status confirmation screens are displayed.

To display the status confirmation

screens

You can use the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE

switch as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch

when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF

(when the cover of the menu operating section is

closed, OFF is automatically selected).

To disable display of the status

confirmation screens

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the SET STATUS page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

You can set the following items on the SET

STATUS page.

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

207

Item

Description

TURBO

SW IND

OFF: When you operate the

GAIN selector after

Adjustments and

Settings from Menus

pressing the button to which

the TURBO GAIN function

has been assigned once, the

video gain is changed

according to the GAIN

selector operation.

Setting gain values for the GAIN

selector positions

ON: When the video gain is

boosted to the video gain to

the value preset by pressing

the button to which the

TURBO GAIN function has

been assigned once, the

video gain is not changed

even if you operate the

GAIN selector, until you

press the button once more.

Turns shockless gain on or off.

You can set the gain values for the L, M, and H

positions of the GAIN selector, which switches

the gain of the video amplifier.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the GAIN SW page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

SHOCK-

LESS

GAIN

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Turn the MENU knob to select the gain

value, and press MENU knob.

Any of –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or

42 dB can be set for each of the L, M, H, and

TURBO positions, in any sequence.

Select the item for the switch position,

then press the MENU knob.

You can set the following items on the GAIN

SW page.

Item

Description

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

GAIN

LOW

Sets the gain value

corresponding to the L position

of the GAIN selector.

Selecting the output signals

GAIN MID Sets the gain value

corresponding to the M position

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

of the GAIN selector.

Sets the gain value

corresponding to the H position

of the GAIN selector.

Sets the gain value

GAIN

HIGH

Display the OUTPUT 1 page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

GAIN

TURBO

corresponding to TURBO GAIN

function.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

You can set the following items on the

OUTPUT 1 page.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

208

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Item

Setting

SDI OUT 1 Selects the signal output from

SELECT

the SDI OUT1 connector.

OFF: Do not output video.

HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.

SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI

You can assign functions by using the

following items.

Item

Description

SDI OUT 2 Selects the signal output from

SELECT

ASSIGN SW

<1>

Assigns the function to

ASSIGN 1 (push-type)

switch.

the SDI OUT2 connector.

OFF: Do not output video.

HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.

SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI

ASSIGN SW

<2>

Assigns the function to

ASSIGN 2 (slide-type)

switch.

SDI OUT 2 Selects whether to superimpose

SUPER

(ON) or not superimpose (OFF)

text information on the signal

output from the SDI OUT2

connector.

ASSIGN SW

<3>

Assigns the function to

ASSIGN 3 (push-type)

switch.

ASSIGN SW

<4>

Assigns the function to

ASSIGN 4 (push-type)

switch.

TEST OUT Selects the output signal from

SELECT

the TEST OUT connector.

VBS: Output composite video

signal. When you select

VBS, connect to the

VIDEO IN connector of

your monitor.

Y: Output HD-Y signal.

R/G/B: Output HD RGB

signal.

Assigns the function to

ASSIGN 5 (push-type)

switch.

[F800]

ASSIGN SW

<5>

ASSIGN SW

<RET>

Assigns the function to RET

button on the lens.

Assigns the function to

COLOR TEMP. button.

[700]

COLOR TEMP

LCD: Output a signal like the

display in the LCD

Select the desired switch or button, and

press the MENU knob.

A selection screen for the selected switch or

button appears. You can use these screens to

assign one of the following functions.

monitor.

TEST OUT Selects whether to superimpose

SUPER

(ON) or not superimpose (OFF)

text information on the signal

output from the TEST OUT

connector.

Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1/

3/4 (push-type) switch, COLOR TEMP.

button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5 switch

(PDW-F800), or RET button on the lens

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting, and press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

Function

OFF

Description

Assigns no function.

Assigns the function that

switches between stereo and

monaural when a stereo

microphone is connected.

Assigns execution of

recording in picture cache

mode.

FRONT MIC

Assigning functions to ASSIGN

switches

PICTURE

CACHE

You can assign the desired function to any of the

ASSIGN switches.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the ASSIGNABLE page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

209

Function

SUPER

(VFDISP&

MENU)

Description

Function

Description

Assigns a mixing switch

function that selects mixing

or no mixing of

ELECTRICAL Assigns the function that

switches between electrical

CC filters (3200K/4300K/

5600K/6300K).

superimposed viewfinder

and menu text data into the

video signals output from the

SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT

connector, when SDI OUT 2

SUPER or TEST OUT

SUPER on the OUTPUT 1

page of the OPERATION

menu are set to ON.

CC 5600K

Assigns the function that

applies an electrical 5600 K

filter.

ZOOM TELE/ For use with a lens that

supports serial

WIDE

communications, assign the

ZOOM TELE setting to

ASSIGN 3, and the WIDE

setting to ASSIGN 4.

MARKER

Assigns the function that

displays or hides all

ZOOM WIDE/ For use with a lens that

markers.

supports serial

TELE

communications, assign the

ZOOM WIDE setting to

ASSIGN 3, and the TELE

setting to ASSIGN 4.

Assigns the function that

deletes the last recorded clip.

Assigns the function that

turns auto tracing white

balance ON and OFF.

RETAKE

ATW

SHOT MARK1 Assigns the function that

records a SHOT MARK 1

essence mark.

RETURN

VIDEO

Assigns the function that

displays in the viewfinder

the HD-Y (1080i) signal

input to the GENLOCK IN

SHOT MARK2 Assigns the function that

records a SHOT MARK 2

essence mark.

connector.

CLIP FLAG

Assign the functions that set

or clear OK, NG, and KEEP

flags during recording or

playback.

LENS RET

Assigns the functions

executed by the RET button

on the lens (recording review

and so on).

CLIP FLAG

KEEP

REC SWITCH Assigns the function that

starts and stops recording.

FOCUS MAG Assigns the function that

magnifies the central part of

the viewfinder picture, for

easier focus adjustment.

TURBO

SWITCH

ZEBRA

Assigns the turbo gain

function.

Assigns the zebra pattern

display function.

(This function does not

affect recorded video or

other signal output.)

FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that

mixes a still picture

(monochrome) and camera

video (color) (effective for

framing shots).

DIGITAL

Assigns the function that

electronically magnifies the

central part of the picture.

(All video output is

EXTENDER

COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that

SW 3200K

switches the white balance to

3200K.

magnified, including

recorded video.)

COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that

SW 4300K

CLIP CONT

REC

Assigns the function that

turns the Clip Continuous

Rec function on and off.

Assigns the items assigned

in the ASSIGN SEL menu.

switches the white balance to

4300K.

COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that

SW 5600K

UA01 to

switches the white balance to

5600K.

UA10

COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that

a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on

the MARKER page of the USER menu, the

SW 6300K

switches the white balance to

6300K.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

210

ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches allow you to display or

not to display all markers.

Function

DIGITAL

Content

Assigns the function that

electronically magnifies the

central part of the picture. (All

video output is magnified,

including recorded video.)

Assigns the function that

turns the Clip Continuous Rec

function on and off.

b) This function cannot be assigned to the RET

button on the lens.

EXTENDER

c) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF

on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the

OPERATION menu, you can use this switch to

display the image of the return video signal on

the viewfinder.

d) Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens

appear.

e) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is

momentarily muted when the digital extender is

switched on and off.

CLIP CONT

REC

UA01 to

Assigns the items assigned in

the ASSIGN SEL menu.

UA10

a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on

the MARKER page of the USER menu, the

ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to

display all markers.

b) The optional CBK-SC02 Analog Composite

Input Board is required for VBS signal input. The

optional CBK-HD01 HD/SD SDI Input Board is

required for SD-SDI/HD-SDI signal input.

c) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is

momentarily muted when the digital extender is

switched on and off.

f) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the

Assign menu.

Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2

(slide-type) switch

Function

Content

OFF

Assigns no function.

FRONT MIC Assigns the function that

switches between stereo and

monaural when a stereo

d) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the

Assign menu.

microphone is connected.

PICTURE

CACHE

Assigns execution of

recording in picture cache

mode.

Note

For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2

(slide-type) switch, you cannot change those

settings using other menus. The function assigned

to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the

menu setting.

SUPER

Assigns a mixing switch

(VFDISP&M function that selects mixing or

ENU)

no mixing of superimposed

viewfinder and menu text data

into the video signals output

from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST

OUT connector, when SDI

OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT

SUPER on the OUTPUT 1

page of the OPERATION

menu are set to ON.

Select the desired function, and press

the MENU knob.

The function is assigned, and the

ASSIGNABLE SW page appears again.

Operation of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches when

UA01 to UA10 are assigned

When an on/off switchable function (or menu

item) is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4

switches, each time the switch is pressed toggles

the function on or off.

MARKER

Assigns the function that

displays or hides all

markers.

REC VIDEO Switches the recording target

When another type of menu item is assigned,

pressing the switch displays the item and its

setting value on the viewfinder screen.

You can then change the setting by pressing and

turning the MENU knob.

The viewfinder screen display disappears

approximately three seconds after the last

operation.

SOURCE

video between the video shot

by the camera and the video

input from an external device

(VBS or SD-SDI/HD-SDI).

Assigns the zebra pattern

display function.

ZEBRA

FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that

mixes a still picture

(monochrome) and camera

video (color) (effective for

framing shots).

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting power saving functions

Setting the color temperature

manually

You can limit the function of some output

connectors to save power consumption.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

You can manually adjust the value of the white

balance by setting the color temperature.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the POWER SAVE page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

Display the WHITE page of the PAINT

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

You can set the following items on the

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

You can set the following items on the

POWER SAVE page.

WHITE page.

Item

Description

Item

Description

ETHERNET/

Enables or disables the

network connector and USB

connector.

COLOR

Sets the color temperature for

USB

TEMP <A> the desired value. Adjust the

value while looking at the real

image because error tends to be

bigger for adjustment of high

color temperature.

Enables or disables the

i.LINK connector (FAM

function).

i.LINK(FAM)

REC AUDIO

OUT

Puts the AUDIO OUT

connectors in EE or SAVE

mode.

C TEMP

BAL <A>

Adjusts the value more

precisely when the color

temperature adjustment

through COLOR TEMP is not

satisfactory.

TEST OUT

SAVE

Switches the TEST OUT

connector power saving

function on and off.

ON: No signals are output if

a cable is not

R GAIN <A> Changes only the value of R

GAIN.

B GAIN <A> Changes only the value of B

GAIN.

connected.

OFF: Signals are always

output, regardless of

whether a cable is

connected.

The above table shows the adjustment of the

white balance of channel A. Items followed

by are used to adjust the white balance

of channel B.

a) When MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC

page of the OPERATION menu is set to

ENABL, the network connector and the USB

connector are enabled regardless of this setting.

b) The unit must be powered off and on again to

enable changes to this setting.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting, and press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

Turn the MENU knob to select the

desired setting, and press the MENU

knob.

Specifying an offset for the auto

white balance setting

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set

all of the desired items.

By setting an offset for the value of auto white

balance, you can make the picture warmer or

colder.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

212

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Note

If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B, the

adjusted value is not reflected in the video output

even though you carry out the following operation.

Display the OFFSET WHT page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting, and press the MENU knob.

If you want to set the other channel, go back

to step 2.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select the desired item, and press the

MENU knob.

You can set the following items in the

Selecting the lens file

The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows

you to change the lens file according to the lens in

use.

OFFSET WHT page.

Item

Description

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

OFFSET

When this item is set to ON,

WHITE <A> the offset adjusted on this page

is added to the white balance

for channel A.

Display the LENS FILE page of the

USER menu, and press the MENU

knob.

WARM-

When OFFSET WHITE <A>

COOL <A> is “ON”, sets the offset for the

white balance of channel A,

using the color temperature.

Adjust the value while looking

at the real image because error

tends to be bigger for

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

“Setting the shot ID” (page 205).

The LENS FILE page shows the name (F.ID)

of the currently selected lens file.

The lens name (L.ID) and manufacturer

(L.MF) appear when a lens that supports

serial communications is mounted.

adjustment of high color

temperature.

WARM-

Adjusts the value more

COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by

<A>

WARM-COOL <A> is not

satisfactory.

U17 LENS FILE

TOP

LENS FILE SELECT:

F.ID:No Offset

OFFSET

When this item is set to ON,

WHITE the offset adjusted on this page

is added to the white balance

for channel B.

L.ID: J16ax8B4 IRSD

L.MF: Canon

WARM-

When OFFSET WHITE

COOL is “ON”, sets the offset for the

white balance of channel B,

using the color temperature.

Adjust the value while looking

at the real image because error

tends to be bigger for

Select LENS FILE SELECT, and press

the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to change the

setting, and press the MENU knob.

adjustment of high color

temperature.

WARM-

Adjusts the value more

COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by

Setting the UMID data

What is a UMID?

The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a

unique identifier for audio-visual material

defined by the SMPTE330M-2003 standard.

WARM-COOL is not

satisfactory.

Set the WHITE BAL switch to the

channel (A or B) that you want to set.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte

Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID, which

includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to

make a total 64 bytes.

Item

Contents

COUNTRY CODE

ORGANIZATION

USER CODE

TIME ZONE

Country code

Organization code

User code

For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.

Time difference from

UTC

Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in

clip units.

The Extended UMID is metadata that provides

additional information such as location, time/

date, company and so on.

For details on how to enter characters, see

Press the MENU knob.

Using the Extended UMID

About UMID ownership information

You have to enter a country code, organization

code and user code. Set the country code referring

to the ISO 3166 table, and set the organization

code and user code independently.

COUNTRY CODE

Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte

alphanumeric strings) according to the values

defined in ISO 3166-1.

There are about 240 country codes.

Find your own country code on the following

home page.

Refer to ISO 3166-1:

http://www.iso.org/iso/country-codes/

iso_3166_code_lists.htm

For details, see “About UMID ownership

information” (page 214).

Functions of UMID data

The UMID data enables the followings:

• Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audio-

visual material. The unique ID is used to detect

the material source and to link it with the

original source material.

• Distinguishing between original material and

copied material. 00 is added to the Instance

Number for original material.

• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used

when recording the UMID. This enables

uniform control of source material recorded all

over the world based on the universal timecode.

• Calculating the date difference among source

materials. The source material is recorded based

on the MJD (Modified Julian Date), which

enables easy calculation of date difference

among source materials.

When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the

active part of the code will occupy the first part of

the 4-bytes and the remainder must be filled with

the space character (20h).

Example: In the case of Japan

For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes,

if JPN, it is 3 bytes.

Thus, enter the following:

JP_ _

JPN _

where _ represents a space.

ORGANIZATION (organization code)

Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string

for the organization code.

To set UMID ownership information

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Notes

Display the UMID SET page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the

MENU knob.

• Organization codes must be acquired by applying to

the SMPTE registration office.

When no organization code has been acquired, it is

forbidden to enter an arbitrary string. As a rule, the

code “00” must be entered. Freelance operators who do

not belong to an origination should enter “~”.

• There are no problems in recording or playing back

audio-video signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Set the following item.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

214

USER CODE

Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user

identification.

The user code is registered with each organization

locally. It is usually not centrally registered.

When the country code is less than 4 bytes, enter

the country code from the beginning of the 4

bytes and enter the space character (20h) in the

remaining strings.

This user code is determined by the organization.

The methods used depend on the organization.

Note

User code cannot be entered when no organization code

has been entered.

TIME ZONE

Set the time difference from UTC.

Notes

• The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using

the time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not

recorded correctly.

• When you change the time zone, adjust the internal

clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder

off and then the power on again.

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

215

Chapter7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

Note

Handling the “Memory

Stick”

If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some

resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may

be turned around or upside down. Do not force the

“Memory Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of

the notch and arrow on the “Memory Stick” before

inserting the “Memory Stick” and then try inserting it

again.

The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or

removed from the camcorder with the power

turned on or off.

To remove the “Memory Stick”

Check that the access indicator is not lit,

then gently press in the “Memory

Stick” once and release.

”Memory Sticks” usable with this

camcorder

With this camcorder, you can use a Sony

“Memory Stick”, “Memory Stick Duo”,

“Memory Stick PRO” whose capacity does not

exceed 4 GB, and “Memory Stick PRO Duo”.

The “Memory Stick” pops out.

Pull the “Memory Stick” towards you

to withdraw it from the slot.

For details, see “About a “Memory Stick”” on page

268.

Note

Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the access

indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the

“Memory Stick”.

Inserting a “Memory Stick”

To protect saved data

To prevent accidental erasure of important setup

data, slide the LOCK switch on the “Memory

Stick” right to the write protect position.

Label

It is now impossible to write or delete data on the

“Memory Stick”. If you try to do so, the message

“MEMORY STICK LOCKED” appears and the

data cannot be overwritten or deleted.

Open the cover of the menu operating

section.

Note

Hold the “Memory Stick” with the

notch facing downward and the arrow

facing away from you, and insert the

“Memory Stick” into the “Memory

Stick” slot until it clicks into place. Then

close the cover.

“Memory Stick Duo” and “Memory Stick PRO Duo” do

not have this function.

To format a “Memory Stick”

Note

Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.

Handling the “Memory Stick”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

216

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Saving and Recalling

User Files

Display the MEMORY STICK page of

the FILE menu, and press the MENU

knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory

Stick” slot, which enables you to save the settings

in the USER menu as a user file onto the

“Memory Stick”. You can load these files from

the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a

particular setting configuration.

In addition to user files, you can save scene files,

reference files, lens files and ALL files in a

“Memory Stick”.

Select M.S. FORMAT, and press the

MENU knob.

A confirmation screen appears.

Select “YES” and press the MENU

knob.

When a menu is displayed, inserting a “Memory

Stick” displays the appropriate file-related menu

page automatically.

Saving user menu data to the

“Memory Stick”

You can save USER menu settings held in the

camcorder as user files in the “Memory Stick”.

You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory

Stick”.

Insert the “Memory Stick” then proceed as

follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the USER FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

?F01 USER FILE

TOP

USER FILE LOAD : EXEC

USER FILE SAVE : EXEC

F.ID : ^{ssssssssssssssss}

USER PRESET

: EXEC

To set a file ID for the data to be saved

Set the file ID before going to step 2.

For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the

file ID” on page 218.

Saving and Recalling User Files

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If data cannot be saved

Select USER FILE SAVE, and press the

MENU knob.

The USER SAVE page appears.

Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used

to save user files to the “Memory Stick”.

Each page can hold up to five files.

If one of the following error messages appears

during or after the save operation, then the data

was not saved.

Error message Cause

Action

NO MEMORY No “Memory

Insert or

STICK

(flashing)

Stick” is

inserted.

reinsert the

“Memory

Stick”.

Turn the MENU knob until the page

which contains the desired file number

appears, and press the MENU knob.

MEMORY

STICK

LOCKED

The LOCK

switch on the

“Memory

Stick” is set to position.

the write

Set the LOCK

switch to the

write enable

Select the desired file number, and

press the MENU knob.

The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO”

appears.

If a file number is followed by “NEW FILE”,

this means that the file is empty. If data is

stored in the file, the file number is followed

by the file name.

protect

position.

MEMORY

STICKERROR “Memory

(flashing) Stick” fault.

Circuit or

Recheck and

consult a Sony

service

representative.

To carry out the save, select YES and

press the MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b

pointing to NO.

To set the file ID

You can set an file ID before you save your data

as a user file. This will help you identify the user

file quickly. The file ID that has been set is saved

together with the data.

The access indicator lights. When the saving

is completed, the message “COMPLETE”

appears and the access indicator goes off.

Note

If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted

The message “NO MEMORY STICK” will

appear. Insert a “Memory Stick” and carry

out the operation once again.

Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick”.

Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

If you select a file number where data has

already been saved

The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b

NO” appears.

• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob

leaving b pointing to NO.

Display the USER FILE page of the

FILE menu.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

items to be displayed” on page 219.

• To overwrite, select YES and press the

MENU knob.

Select F. ID, and press the MENU knob.

A character table appears.

You can select the information displayed on

each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.

F01 USER FILE

TOP

USER FILE LOAD :

USER FILE SAVE :

EXEC

For details, see “To select the file information

F.ID :?

i#$%&'()*+,-./012345678

9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk

lmnopqrstuvwxyz~

About the USER menu settings to be saved in the

“Memory Stick”

Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu

INS DEL RET

ESC END

are saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file.

Saving and Recalling User Files

218

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Follow steps 3 and 4 described in

“Setting the shot ID” on page 205 to

enter characters.

Display type Description

ALL

File ID (10 characters) and

date (year/month/day)

F.ID

File ID (16 characters)

Date saved (year/month/day/

hours/minutes/seconds)

Information on the model

When you have finished entering the

file ID, turn the MENU knob to move x

to END, and press the MENU knob.

The entered file ID is now displayed.

DATE

MODEL

F01 USER FILE

TOP

Loading saved data from a

“Memory Stick”

USER FILE LOAD : EXEC

USER FILE SAVE : EXEC

F.ID : ID-001

USER PRESET

: EXEC

Note

The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the

data saved in the camcorder.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

File ID that has been set appears.

Display the USER FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

When you carry out a user file save operation (see

page 217), the set file ID is saved to the “Memory

Stick” together with the data.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

To select the file information items to be

displayed

You can select the user file information items to

be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and

USER FILE LOAD page (P00 to P19), that are

the pages used to save and call up the data to and

from “Memory Stick”.

Select USER FILE LOAD, and press

the MENU knob.

The USER LOAD page appears.

Turn the MENU knob until the page

which contains the desired file number

appears, then press the MENU knob.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Select the desired file number, and

press the MENU knob.

The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO”

appears.

Display a USER FILE LOAD page or

USER FILE SAVE page of the USER

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

To carry out the load, select YES and

press the MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b

pointing to NO.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select DISPLAY MODE, and press the

MENU knob.

The access indicator lights.

When the load is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears and the access

indicator goes off.

Select the desired type of file

information, and press the MENU

knob.

If data cannot be loaded

If one of the following error messages appears

during or after the load operation, then the data

was not loaded.

Saving and Recalling User Files

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error

message

Cause

Action

Saving and Loading

Scene Files

MEMORY

STICK

No “Memory

Stick” is

inserted.

Insert or reinsert

the “Memory

Stick”.

(flashing)

MEMORY

STICK

ERROR

(flashing)

FILE

Circuit or

“Memory Stick” consult a Sony

fault.

Recheck, and

You can save various settings for shooting a

particular scene as a scene file. By loading the

scene file, you can quickly recreate setup

conditions suitable for the scene. You can save up

to five scene files in the camcorder memory and

up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick” .

You can also load data from the “Memory Stick”

into the camcorder memory.

service

representative.

Data saved to a

The “Memory

Stick” contains “Memory Stick”

data that cannot using a

ERROR

(flashing)

be loaded into

camcorder

this camcorder. whose model is

not the same as

this camcorder

Data that can be saved in a scene file

You can save the following data in a scene file:

• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu

• Shutter speed settings made in the standard

mode and ECS mode

cannot be loaded

into this

camcorder.

• The white balance data included in a scene file

depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting

on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.

Returning the user file settings to

the standard settings

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Saving a scene file

To save a scene file to the “Memory Stick”, insert

the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot

before starting the following operation.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the USER FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select USER PRESET, and press the

MENU knob.

Display the SCENE FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operation, see “Basic menu

operations” on page 193.

?F04 SCENE FILE

TOP

:STANDARD

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID: STANDARD

: EXEC

To set a file ID for the data to be saved

Set the file ID before going to step 2.

For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the

file ID” on page 218.

Saving and Loading Scene Files

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

220

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Select SCENE STORE, and press the

MENU knob.

The SCENE STORE page appears.

Display the SCENE FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

Press the MENU knob, then select the

desired file number, and press the

MENU knob again.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

items to be displayed” on page 219.

The file to be saved is selected.

Select SCENE STORE, and press the

MENU knob.

One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.

When no “Memory Stick” is inserted

Select the desired memory number, and press

the MENU knob.

When the save is completed, the SCENE

FILE page appears again.

Turn the MENU knob to select the

desired SCENE STORE page, and

press the MENU knob.

When you select a file number where data

has already been saved

The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b

NO” appears.

Select 5FILE SAVE B MEM1-5, and

press the MENU knob.

• To cancel the overwriting, press the MENU

knob leaving b pointing to NO.

• To overwrite, select YES and press the

MENU knob.

The message “STORE OK? YES b

NO”appears.

To carry out the save, select YES and

press the MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b

pointing to NO.

When a “Memory Stick” is inserted

You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20,

to save scene files in the “Memory Stick”.

Each page can hold up to five files.

When the save is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears.

1 Turn the MENU knob until the page

which contains the desired file number

appears, then press the MENU knob.

2 Select the desired file number, and

press the MENU knob.

The message “STORE OK? YES b

NO” appears.

3 To carry out the save, select YES and

press the MENU knob.

Note

If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3,

those files are replaced with files loaded from the

camcorder memory. For example, files from 001 to 005

are replaced by the above procedure.

To set the file ID

You can set an file ID before you save your data

as a scene file. This will help you identify the

scene file quickly. The file ID that has been set is

saved together with the data.

To cancel, press the MENU knob

leaving b pointing to NO.

You can select the file information items

to be displayed on each page of SCENE

STORE and SCENE RECALL.

You can carry out a scene file ID setting operation

on the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.

For details, see “To select the file information

For details about this operation, see the description

of step 2 and following of “To set the file ID” on

page 218.

To save scene files stored in the

camcorder memory to the “Memory

Stick”

The five scene files stored in the camcorder

memory can be saved to the “Memory Stick” all

in a single operation.

Saving and Loading Scene Files

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1 Select SCENE RECALL, and press the

MENU knob.

To select the file information items to be

displayed

You can select the items of file information to be

displayed on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to

P20) or the SCENE RECALL pages (P01 to P20)

used for saving data to or loading data from a

“Memory Stick”.

You can select the scene file information items to

be displayed on the SCENE STORE page and

SCENE RECALL page of the SCENE FILE

menu.

The SCENE RECALL page appears.

2 Turn the MENU knob until the page

which contains the desired file number

appears, then press the MENU knob.

3 Select the desired file number, and

press the MENU knob.

The message “RECALL OK? YES b

NO” appears.

To carry out the recall, select YES and

press the MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b

pointing to NO.

For details about item selection, see the description

of step 2 and following of “To select the file

information items to be displayed” on page 219.

When the loading is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is

set up according to the loaded scene file. If no

file is present with a particular file number,

this is shown as “NO FILE”.

Loading scene files

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

To load scene files from the “Memory

Stick” into the camcorder memory

Display the SCENE FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

You can load up to five scene files stored in the

“Memory Stick” into the camcorder memory all

in a single operation.

To load the scene file stored in the

camcorder, select the desired file

number, and press the MENU knob.

s on the left of the file number changes to

x. The camcorder is set up according to the

loaded scene file.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Display the SCENE FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

F04 SCENE FILE

TOP

:SCENE 25

:SCENE 26

:SCENE 27

:SCENE 28

:NO FILE

Select SCENE RECALL, and press the

MENU knob.

The SCENE RECALL page appears.

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID :SCENE21

: EXEC

Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE

RECALL page which contains the

desired scene files appears, and press

the MENU knob.

To cancel the selected scene file

Turn the MENU knob to move b to x, and

press the MENU knob again. x changes to

s. The camcorder returns to the settings

before selecting this scene file.

Select 5FILE LOAD b MEM1-5, and

press the MENU knob.

The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO”

appears.

To load a scene file saved in the “Memory

Stick”

Saving and Loading Scene Files

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

222

P01 SCENE RECALL

RECALL OK? YES NO

ESC

ALL

Jumping to a File-Related

Menu Page When Inserting

a “Memory Stick”

DISPLAY MODE

001.SCENE1

002.SCENE2

003.NO FILE

004.SCENE4

005.SCENE5

***.5FILE LOAD

MEM1-5

A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files,

scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL

files.

To carry out the load (recall), select

YES and press the MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b

pointing to NO.

The camcorder menu system allows you to make

a setting so that when a “Memory Stick” holding

these files is inserted while in menu operating

mode, a menu page relating to the desired file is

automatically displayed on the screen. Thus you

can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very

convenient especially when you manage data files

using “Memory Stick”s.

When loading is complete, the message

“COMPLETE” appears and the access

indicator goes off.

Notes

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”

overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.

• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder

memory when the “Memory Stick” is inserted,

return to the P00 SCENE RECALL page and load

the desired scene file in the camcorder memory.

• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO

FILE”), an existing file of the same number is

unaffected. In the example shown in step 4,

MEM3 is not overwritten.

Display the MEMORY STICK page of

the FILE menu, and press the MENU

knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

Select MS IN > JUMP TO, and press the

MENU knob.

The MS IN > JUMP TO page allows you to

select one of the following settings.

Returning the scene file settings

to the standard settings

Setting

Description

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

OFF

Disables this function. Menu pages

do not change when a “Memory

Stick” is inserted.

Display the SCENE FILE page of the

FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.

USER

ALL

Jumps to the USER FILE page.

Jumps to the ALL FILE page.

SCENE Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.

LENS Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

REFER Jumps to the REFERENCE page.

USER 1 Jumps to the USER 1 FILE page.

Select STANDARD, and press the

MENU knob.

s displayed on the left of STANDARD

changes to x. When x changes to s once

again, the settings of the camcorder are reset

to the standard settings.

Turn the MENU knob until the name of

the desired file page appears, then press

the MENU knob.

Notes

In the following cases, jumping to the target page is

impossible.

• When the power is turned on after you insert a

“Memory Stick”.

If you press the MENU knob again while x

is displayed, the operation is cancelled and

the camcorder returns to the settings before

STANDARD was selected.

• When OFF is selected on the MS IN > JUMP TO page.

Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

223

• When any of the following menu pages is already

displayed.

- A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of

the FILE menu

- MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE,

LENS FILE, REFERENCE or ROM VERSION

page

Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”

224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter8 File Operations

Overview

A remote computer can be connected to this unit

and used to operate on recorded data which has

been saved in data files, such as video and audio

data files.

There are two ways to connect a remote

computer.

• FAM connection

Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector on this

unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the

remote computer, using an i.LINK cable (see

page 230).

• FTP connection

Connect the network connectors on this unit and

the remote computer, using a network cable (see

page 234).

Directory structure

The following figure shows the directory

structure of discs visible to a remote computer.

Note

This structure is not the same as the actual structure

recorded on the disc.

(Continued)

a) Root directory

b) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING

page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE

Overview

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(Continued)

File operation restrictions

This section explains which operations are

possible on files stored in each directory.

When required, the following operation tables

distinguish reading and writing from partial

reading and writing.

Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the

end of the file.

Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the

file.

Write: Write data sequentially from the start to

the end of the file.

Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.

Note

Operations other than Read and Partial read are possible

only when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to

recording enabled.

Overview

226

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Root directory

File name

Content

Operations

Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete

Partial Partial

read

write

INDEX.XML

Contains data for management of the

material on the disc.

Yes

Contains conversion tables for assigning Yes

user-defined names to clips and clip lists.

ALIAS.XML

DISCMETA.XML Contains metadata to indicate the disc

properties.

Yes

MEDIAPRO.XML Contains a list of materials on the disc,

basic properties, related information, and

information about access methods.

Yes

SYSPRO.XML

Contains system setting information and Yes

menu setting information for the devices.

Files other than the above

Other files

a) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING

page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.

b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.

Notes

• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.

• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub,

UserData, General, and PROAV) cannot be deleted or

renamed.

Clip directory

File name

Content

Operations

Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete

Partial Partial

read

write

b), c)

Clip file created by recording (MXF file) Yes

*: 0001 to 9999

C*.MXF

Yes

Metadata file generated automatically

when C*.MXF file is created.

*: 0001 to 9999

Yes

C*M01.XML

Yes

User metadata file. This type of file is

generated automatically during recording

via an FTP or FAM connection when the

unit recognizes that an MXF file contains

metadata that was generated by a non-

XDCAM device.

Yes

C*M02.KLV

Yes

*: 0001 to 9999

Other files

Files other than the above

a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.

b) Overwriting is not possible.

d) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING

page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.

e) Any clip may be selected and deleted.

f) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.

g) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is

changed, a C*M01.XML file (or a C*M02.KLV file)

with the same name in the “C*” part is also changed

automatically.

c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in

a format matching the format (system frequency

(59.94i, 50i, or 25P)) and recording format (MPEG

HD422 and number of audio channels) of the recorded

sections of the disc, and which can be overwritten by

XDCAM. (Partial writing is not possible.)

Overview

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

h) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file

with the same name in the “C*” part is created

automatically.

Note

Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.

i) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file

(or a C*M02.KLV file) with the same name in the

“C*” part is also deleted automatically.

Edit directory

File name

Content

Operations

Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete

Partial Partial

read

write

Clip list file

*: 0001 to 0099

Yes

E*E01.SMI

Yes

Metadata file generated automatically

when E*E01.SMI file is created.

*: 0001 to 0099

Yes

E*M01.XML

Yes

Other files

Files other than the above

a) The “E*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.

b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial

writing is not possible.

f) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML

file with the same name in the “E*” part is also

generated automatically.

g) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML

file with the same name in the “E*” part is also deleted

automatically.

c) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING

page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.

d) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.

e) When the “E*” part of a E*E01.SMI is changed, an

E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part

is also changed automatically.

Note

Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.

Sub directory

File name

Content

Operations

Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete

Partial Partial

read

write

Proxy AV data (MXF file) generated

automatically when a C*.MXF file is

created.

Yes

C*S01.MXF

Other files

*: 0001 to 9999

Files other than the above

a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.

b) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is

changed, a C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the

“C*” part is generated automatically.

c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.MXF file

with the same name in the “C*” part is generated

automatically.

d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.MXF file

with the same name in the “C*” part is also deleted

automatically.

Note

Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.

Overview

228

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UserData directory

File name

Content

Operations

Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete

Partial Partial

read

write

Any file

Yes

a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length.

(Depending on the character type, file names

(including extension) may be limited to 21

characters.)

The following directory operations are possible in the

UserData directory.

• Directory creation (up to 62 levels, including the

UserData directory)

• Deletion and renaming of directories

General directory

File name

Content

Operations

Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete

Partial Partial

read

write

Any file

Yes

a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length.

(Depending on the character type, file names

(including extension) may be limited to 21

characters.)

PROAV directory

This directory displays individual files on the

disc.

To enable display of the PROAV directory, set

PROAV DISPLAY on the CAM CONIG 1 page

of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ENABL”.

The following directory operations are possible in the

General directory.

• Directory creation (up to 63 levels, including the

General directory)

• Deletion and renaming of directories

Notes

• The maximum number of files that can be created on

one disc, including directories, is 5,000 for a single-

layer disc and 6,000 for a dual-layer disc.

• File names and directory names can use letters,

numbers, and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8)

character set. ¹⁾

However, the following control characters and

symbols cannot be used.

- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F

- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ', ?, \, |

• To create a new directory in the General directory, first

create a directory on the desktop and rename it using

only characters that can be used on this unit. Then drag

it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory.

1) The following character codes cannot be used by FAM

connections.

U+010000, U+020000, U+030000, U+040000,

U+050000, U+060000, U+070000, U+080000,

U+090000, U+0A0000, U+0B0000, U+0C0000,

U+0D0000, U+0E0000, U+0F0000, U+100000

Overview

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

column is displayed, allowing you to check the

version of ProDisc.

File Operations in File

Access Mode (for

Windows)

To enable FAM connections over the i.LINK

connector

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn

the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)

Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the

POWER SAVE page of the

OPERATION menu, then press the

MENU knob.

File access mode operating environment

Operating system requirements for file operations

by file access mode (called FAM below) are as

follows.

Computer operating system: Microsoft

Windows XP Professional SP2 or higher, or

Microsoft Windows Vista Business/Ultimate

(32 bit)

For details on menu operations, see “Basic

limitations during FAM connections” on

U07 POWER SAVE

TOP

ETHERNET/USB

iLINK(FAM)

DSABL

Note

REC AUDIO OUT

64-bit editions of Windows Vista are not supported.

Preparations

Install the FAM driver on the remote computer.

To install the FAM driver

Move b to i.LINK(FAM) then press the

MENU knob.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM

Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of

your computer, navigate to the FAM Driver

directory, and run the installer in the directory for

your operating system, then follow the

installation instructions.

Turn the MENU knob to select

“ENABL”, then press the MENU knob.

The message “Valid after power off.”

appears.

For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the

CD-ROM disc.

Power the camcorder off, and then

power it on again.

The setting made in step 3 is enabled.

Note

Use Version 2.10 or higher of the FAM driver. The FAM

driver on the supplied CD-ROM is Version 2.10 or

higher.

If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer,

check the version (see the next section).

Making FAM connections

If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put

the unit into the following state.

Recording, playback, search and other

disc operations: Stopped

To check the FAM driver version

For Windows XP:

Select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs

> ProDisc, and click on “Click here for support

information.”

THUMBNAIL indicator: Off

Disc access by clip deletion, disc

formatting, or other operation:

Stopped

For Windows Vista:

(1) Select Control Panel > Programs, open the

Programs and Features window, right click in the

window’s header bar (including the Name,

Publisher, and other headers), and select Others...

(2) In the Choose Details dialog, check the

Version check box and click OK. The Version

Picture Cache function and Interval Rec

function: Off

MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF

Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear

File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)

230

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If this unit is connected to a remote

computer by FTP, log out from the FTP

session (see page 235).

Notes

• If you power this unit off during a FAM

connection, the data transferred thus far is

discarded.

• All file operations are not possible for some types

of files.

Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector

on this unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394)

connector on the remote computer,

using an i.LINK cable.

For details, see “File operation restrictions”

(page 226).

Windows recognizes this unit as a removable

disc, and displays one of the following icons

on the remote computer’s taskbar:

To eject discs from a remote computer

Right click the icon representing this unit in

Explorer, and select Eject from the menu which

appears.

• Windows XP:

• Windows Vista:

The remote computer is now able to perform

file operations when a disc is inserted into

this unit.

Exiting file operations

Note

Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to

You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into

the state described in step 1 after connecting the

cable. To log in, disconnect the cable, put the unit

into the state described in step 1, and connect it

again.

Do one of the following on the

icon displayed in the remote computer’s

taskbar.

When you make your first FAM connection

The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears

when you connect this unit to your computer.

Select “Install the software automatically

(Recommended)”, and then click the Next button.

Click the Finish button when the software

installation finishes.

• Double click.

• Right click to display the context menu and

select “Safely Remove Hardware” from the

context menu.

The Safely Remove Hardware dialog

appears.

Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-**** IEEE

1394 SBP2 Device” (****: “F800” or

“700”) and click “Stop”.

Operation limitations during FAM connections

• With the exception of the EJECT button,

recording buttons and playback control buttons

are disabled.

• VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from

devices connected to the REMOTE connector

(8-pin) and (i.LINK) S400 connector.

The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears.

Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-**** IEEE

1394 SBP2 Device” (****: “F800” or

“700”) and click “OK”.

In Windows XP, “Sony XDCAM PDW-

**** IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” (****:

“F800” or “700”) is deleted from the list of

hardware devices.

In Windows Vista, the message “This device

can be safely removed from your computer.”

appears.

This unit can now resume normal operations.

(The limitations described in “Operation

page 231 no longer apply.)

Operating on files

Start Explorer.

Check that a drive letter has been assigned to

this unit. (The drive letter will differ

depending on the number of other peripherals

connected to the remote computer.)

Use Explorer to perform file operations

on the disc loaded in this unit.

You can operate in the same way that you

operate on local drives and files on network

computers.

Disconnect the i.LINK cable as

required.

File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

231

To make a reconnection

To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one

of the following, depending on whether an

i.LINK cable is connected.

i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit

and a remote computer with an i.LINK cable.

i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the

i.LINK cable from either this unit or the

remote computer, wait for at least 10

seconds, and then reconnect the disconnected

cable.

File Operations in File

Access Mode (for

Macintosh)

File access mode operating environment

Operating system requirements for file operations

by file access mode are as follows.

Computer operating system: Mac OS X

v10.4.11 or higher

The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is

connected: Power the unit on.

Preparations

Do the following on the remote computer and this

unit.

• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer

(see the next item).

• Set i.LINK(FAM) on the POWER SAVE page

of the OPERATION menu to ENABL (see

page 212).

To install the FAM driver

Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM

Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of

your computer, and execute the FAM Driver

>Mac >dmg file of the FAM Driver, then follow

the installation instructions.

For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the

CD-ROM disc.

To check the FAM driver version

Connect this unit to your computer with an

i.LINK cable, and then, with a disc loaded, start

the system profiler utility of the application. The

version appears to the right of “prodisk_fs” when

you select “Advanced Functions” under

“Software”.

Making FAM connections

If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put

the unit into the following state.

Recording, playback, search and other

disc operations: Stopped

THUMBNAIL indicator: Off

Disc access by clip deletion, disc

formatting, or other operation:

Stopped

Picture Cache function and Interval Rec

function: Off

File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

232

For details, see “File operation restrictions”

(page 226).

MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF

Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear

To eject discs from a remote computer

Click the eject button to the right of the icon for

this unit in the Finder, or drag the icon for this unit

from the Finder to the Trash.

If this unit is connected to a remote

computer by FTP, log out from the FTP

session (see page 235).

Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector

on this unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394)

connector on the remote computer,

using an i.LINK cable.

Exiting file operations

Note

When a disc is inserted into this unit, the

remote computer recognizes this unit as a

removable disc. The following icon appears

in the Finder on the remote computer,

indicating that the computer is now able to

perform file operations.

Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1

and 2.

Eject the disc by clicking the eject

button to the right of the icon for this

unit in the Finder, or by dragging the

icon for this unit from the Finder to the

Trash.

Disconnect the i.LINK cable as

required.

Operation limitations during FAM connections

• With the exception of the EJECT button,

recording buttons and playback control buttons

are disabled.

• Do not use the EJECT button to eject discs.

Always eject discs from the computer.

• Do not disconnect the i.LINK cable during a

FAM connection. Doing so may result in

unstable operation. Always eject any loaded

disc before disconnecting the i.LINK cable.

To make a reconnection

To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one

of the following, depending on whether an

i.LINK cable is connected.

i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit

and a remote computer with an i.LINK cable.

i.LINK cable is connected: The unit is mounted

automatically, so you do not need to do

anything.

The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is

connected: Power the unit on.

Operating on files

Start the Finder.

Check to be sure that a drive has been

assigned to this unit.

Operate from the Finder on the files on

the disc in this unit.

You can operate in the same way that you

operate on local drives and files on network

computers.

Notes

• If you power this unit off during a FAM

connection, the data transferred thus far is

discarded.

• All file operations are not possible for some types

of files.

File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

U07 POWER SAVE

TOP

FTP File Operations

ETHERNET/USB

iLINK(FAM)

DSABL

REC AUDIO OUT

File operations between this unit and a remote

computer can be carried out by the File Transfer

Protocol (called FTP below).

Move b to ETHERNET/USB then press

the MENU knob.

Preparations

Turn the MENU knob to select

“ENABL”, then press the MENU knob.

Connect the network connectors of this

unit and a remote computer with a

network cable. Or connect this unit to

the network to which the remote

computer is connected.

Making FTP connections

FTP connections between this unit and a remote

computer can be made with either of the

following.

• The command prompt

• FTP client software

On the NETWORK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, set the IP

address and other network setting items

for this unit.

This section explains how to use the command

prompt. For more information about using FTP

client software, refer to the documentation of the

FTP client software on your system.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic